Home

Object Controller

Contents

1. 9 I3NVd LNOHJ x 3 8 i Ss3uqav di Wo1sno Q H NN ML ama YOLOANNOO ove Ri S3MOd 1 1001 83M o O lt 5 9 097 580 asna 1HOd OI1SONSVIG s H 9 HOLIMS 992691 YOLOANNOD ey M 81804 O z 3dO NO L di 5 lo lo ef S1HOd foooox ooo 52 gt SOM1d m 5 v uasn i XX L z waen 10001080084 s wasn He 3uvM14OS 3AI1n93X3 Sel zing m MOTI3A lo 8 31 LNdLNO 1 5831 2 TANNVHO WINOO o 5 s H3TIOHINOO 193 sq31 1 TANNVHO WINOO 9 HOIO3NNOO t 8 m VNEIS OQIVSNV HLIWAH DUI n NOINA 3OTOHOINW
2. MULTICAST mode MODE 2 is selected to transport the CLASSC EMP protocol Uncomment the following 2 lines to set the required MultiCast IP address and PORT for CLASSC EMP messages MULTICAST GROUP 239 255 0 5 MULTICAST PORT 32768 5 12 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 E AnsaldoSTS Object Controller Configuration Setup 5 6 2 Modify niacfg ini with the New Settings The IP settings are specified in this file See Figure 5 8 They must be uncommented and the proper values entered CAUTION Extreme care should be exercised in making any changes to the niacfgini file ANY error in this file will make the Digi inoperative and render the unit useless NOTE The recommended procedure for changing an IP address is through the use of the Digi Discovery Utility Refer to Section 6 This tool will automatically detect an addressable active port When reviewing the file on your PC the following should be noted The WEB port should not need to be modified except for address if connected to a network Mode 1 is set to PEER UDP is the default for connectivity The application ports and 2 See Figure 1 6
3. ama aa 90 MOTTAA saat inaino N3399 Sq31 LNdNI A Object Controller N17700105 Front and Rear Panels Figure 3 4 3 9 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 to 3NVd MOVd et mif 7 FS H s d Mi zu 6 8 4 9 s 5 HOLOJNNOO es 1indino z m er E XX 5 o 10001060084 Fit 1308 3AI1n93X3 6 VSN NI 8 9 90082 4 133015 8 979 9 1 8 9 HOLIMS NOINN 9 20000000X N S 300000000X N d P TYN IS r IVN IS HOLIMS NOINA OC Configurations 121 2 HOLOS3NNOO LNdNI MS asn 1HOd HOLIMS 440 NO son d sq31 2 SQ31 TANNVHO WAOO 3935
4. 8 3 General Options The defaults are listed with each option Example MODE 0 the default is the WebTool mode MODE 0 OZWebTool mode PEER Routing mode BIT RATE 9600 This sets the baud rate that the Digi uses to communicate with the OC Both modes use this option IP 169 254 1 10 The IP Address of the Digi port 255 255 0 0 The Netmask of the Digi port GATEWAY 0 0 0 0 The Gateway of the Digi port 8 3 1 Option for the WebTool Mode CLIENT_TIME_OUT 300 Sets the session timeout in seconds for the Network Diagnostic Tool 8 4 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 A E AnsaldoSTS Network Adapter Configuration niacfg ini 8 3 2 Options for the PEER Routing Mode BROADCAST 1 This option allows the Digi to broadcast messages to the local subnet when it doesn t know the IP mapping for a PEER address LEARN 1 This option allows the Digi to learn the IP mapping of a PEER address sent to it When used with BROADCAST it will only let the first few messages be broadcast on the network after which messages will be directed TTL 300 This option is used with LEARN to set a time for how long the learned IP mapping is in use When the time since the last message exceeds this time the learned IP mapping is removed PORT 60000 This option specifies what internet port address to listen for PEER messages on
5. e Object Controller N17700111 Front and Rear Panels Figure 3 8 3 15 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 77 AnsaldoSTS lt OC Configurations 39NV30O SHOLO3NNOO LNdNI TANVd MOVE pt m 0000000000000000 1000106008 3HVM140S 3AI1n93X3 90062 25 Sungsarvg 133418 TI3SSnH 979 7IVNOIS HOLIMS NOINN 4371081105 1 3OTOHOIN 5 HOTIMS NON i YMOLOANNOOD LNNI asnd 1HOd OLLSONDVIG HOLIMS 440 NO S1HOd NOILVOMddV ONIAAM uasn SQ31 2 TANNVHO 58371 TANNVHO WWOO Naau5 T TANVd LNOHH gt r 5 9 a d
6. This section is similar to UDP The difference is each connection has its own host port number The format of entries in this section are as follows host ip port gt lt target ip address gt lt target ip port gt lt MLK PEER address list gt Example 60001 192 168 1 10 60000 00CA 60002 192 168 1 11 60010 0002 5 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 5 11 Object Controller Configuration Setup 7 AnsaldoSTS HMAC adds message authentication protocol of the PEER protocol A Key Server is required for this function to work When is enabled all messages sent encapsulated with the HMAC protocol 0 0 HMAC disabled 1 HMAC enabled SERVER 0 0 0 0 HMAC Key Server IP address PORT 5840 HMAC Key Server IP port KEY TIMEOUT 2000 Time in seconds between HMAC Key heartbeat messages KEY RETRYS 3 Number of missed heartbeats before key is declared invalid MULTICAST
7. 1 5 Figure 1 4 The Rear of the MICROLOK Object 1 6 Figure 1 5 The Front of the MICROLOK Object 1 1 esee 1 7 Figure 3 1 Object Controller N17700101 Front and Rear 3 3 Figure 3 2 Object Controller N17700102 Front and Rear 3 4 Figure 3 3 Object Controller N17700103 Front and Rear 3 7 Figure 3 4 Object Controller N17700105 Front and Rear 3 9 Figure 3 5 Object Controller N17700106 Front and Rear 3 10 Figure 3 6 Object Controller N17700107 Front and Rear 3 12 Figure 3 7 Object Controller N17700108 Front and Rear 3 13 Figure 3 8 Object Controller N17700111 Front and Rear 3 15 Figure 3 9 Object Controller N17700112 Front and Rear 3 16 Figure 3 10 Object Controller N17700115 Front and Rear
8. 8 4 8 3 2 Options for the PEER Routing Mode L 8 5 8 3 3 UDP Options i ret Ronde Rar Ete Gee ee de didis 8 5 8 3 4 TEP art rr rf e dere tr d aski 8 6 9 95 CHMAG ODIIOLIS 35 2 ed Bo Re sette eoe ree oet baa bau qua bas 8 7 8 4 Erasing the Existing Configuration 8 7 9 GPS MASTER SPECIFICATIONS 1 i SS fla oh cad ace ck uuu Sasu us isa ua 9 1 9 1 2 CLASSC EMP Protocol Link Specifications esses 9 8 10 NETWORK DIAGNOSTIC TOOL WEBTOQOLL u 10 1 10 1 Minimum 2 22244221 esent 10 1 10 2 Launching the Network Diagnostic 0 10 1 10 3 Mairi MONU ee hen cete eet tendre tdem cete ate ds 10 3 19 4 Run Timoe MOnltor E E DRE si o t i ets 10 4 10 4 1 Board 10 4 10 4 2 CinkeInformaton ci i ptis 10 5 10 4 3 Free Run Variable 444 10 6 10 4 4 Serial Message Monitor enne enne nnns nnns tenens 10 9 10 5 Historical iie hei e 10 11 10 5 1 User Data Log casei nam desit de
9. E El 2 Sre 1198 vot asna 0000000000000000 5 0000000000000000 N 9 o o XX A3H 000105008 05 90082 25 OHngS31v8 133415 TI3SShH Gro IWNDIS 9 HOLIMS H3TIOHLNOO 103 90 O0 10HOIN e 0000000000009 9090 5 N YOLOANNOO LNdNI asna 140d HOLIMS 440 NO 51408 gt aay T3NVd LNOtid TOOL 83M Woo 854 00 di WOLSND 8851 TANNVHO IWNINOO A 80311 T3NNVHO Ssauaav OWN di 1 ooo OVW L WOO Je anawa S H3TIOHLINOO 103080 1
10. a ania d31 qat 091 90 MOTI3A sam indino san MOT13A saat indino sq311 dNI T Object Controller N17700107 Front and Rear Panels Figure 3 6 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 3 12 OC Configurations HOLO3NNOO 39NVHO HOLO3NNOO 1 4 AnsaldoSTS Yo TANVd MOVE EX E O 0000000000000 E E B XX 1000106008 SYVMLIOS 1 90082 95 1 8 133415 TIISSNY Svo IWNOIS HOLIMS MATIOWLNOD 193f80 asnd HOLIMS 440 NO HOLO3NNOO u3MOd soma SNIA34 LNOHJ 1 OILSONDVIG 1 14904 8031 Y4SN z WOO 80312 T3NNVHO WWOO L WOO SQ31 IN
11. Addresses are specified the application as decimal Addresses are specified in this niacfg ini file as hexadecimal Examples Application niacfg ini Address 101 0065 Address 202 00 The format of entries in this section are as follows lt target ip address gt lt target ip port gt lt MLK PEER address list gt The lt MLK PEER address list gt is a comma separated list of addresses it NO SPACES ARE ALLOWED IN THE LIST A mix of MIl and ATCS addressing schemes is OK Example 192 168 1 2 60000 002 0022 34 78 43 78 5 10 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Object Controller Configuration Setup if PAIR 1 then the pair must be present Example 192 168 1 16 60000 00CA 0065 PAIR 1 format 1 Port 1 Destination IP address 192 168 1 16 which hosts MLK Address 202 192 168 1 10 60000 00CA
12. 3 31 Figure 3 23 Standard Inputs and Outputs for Part Numbers 17700117 and N17700118 3 32 Figure 3 24 Ethernet Interface Pin 3 34 Figure 3 25 Power and WAGO 3 35 Figure 3 26 RS 232 DB 9 Pin Assignments Front 2 3 36 Figure 4 1 IE Ver 6 Tools Drop Down 4 2 Figure 4 2 Internet Explorer Internet Options Dialog 4 2 Figure 4 3 Delete Files Confirmation Dialog BOx eene emen 4 3 Figure 4 4 Tools Drop Down Mernl odere te 4 3 Figure 4 5 Connections Tab on the Internet Options 4 4 Figure 4 6 LAN Settings Pop Up 4 5 Figure 4 7 Proxy Settings Pop Up 4 6 Figure 4 8 Connectivity Mode Indication 4 7 Figure 5 1 Internet Explorer Site 169 254 1 10 5 3 Figure 5 2 NA HTTP AWS Realm Logon Dialog Box 5 3 Figure 5 3 MICROLOK Object Controller Net 5 4 Figure 5 4 Net Adapter Advanced Tools 5 5 Figure 5 5 OC Network Settings U 5 6 Figure 5 6 EFEASHOADIireetoryzaku q a u raten e p Da eue 5 7 Figure 5 7 Saviriginiactgnmb s
13. 5 8 Figure 5 8 Web Tool Flera n tere d rte 5 8 Figure 5 9 MEK Upload CINK RR 5 14 Figure 5 10 Upload 5 14 Figure 5 11 File Upload Progress 5 15 Figure 5 12 FLASHO Directory u 5 16 Figure 6 1 Digi Device Discovery Utility nnne 6 1 Figure 6 2 Digi Device Discovery Main 6 2 5 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 vii Figure 6 3 Figure 6 4 Figure 6 5 Figure 6 6 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 7 3 Figure 7 4 Figure 7 5 Figure 7 6 Figure 8 1 Figure 8 2 Figure 9 1 Figure 9 2 Figure 9 3 Figure 9 4 Figure 9 5 Figure 9 6 Figure 9 7 Figure 9 8 Figure 9 9 Figure 9 10 Figure 9 11 Figure 10 1 Figure 10 2 Figure 10 3 Figure 10 4 Figure 10 5 Figure 10 6 Figure 10 7 Figure 10 8 Figure 10 9 Figure 10 10 Figure 10 11 Figure 10 12 TabeofComents 515 Configure Network Settings Dialog aa 6 3 Device Password Dialog a U u 6 4 Error Dialog BOX a ee ut dit 6 5 Open Web Interface from Digi Device Discovery 6 6 Advanced Lools Page y i da tts 7 1 File Upload uu qnt te on eA hu 7 2 File Upload eneun Q qa ee 7 2 RAMO Directory Scree
14. 11 5 11 8 ASSIGN Statement intei 11 8 11 9 Compiler Defined System Bits and 11 9 11 10 Reserved 11 11 11 11 ExDreS8I008 Lulu cede eo 11 13 11 11 1 Boolean Logic ASSIGN Statements 11 13 11 12 Boolean Logic vs Relay 11 14 11 12 1 ASSIGN Statement One 11 14 11 12 2 ASSIGN Statement Two nn ua 11 14 11 12 3 ASSIGN Statement Three 11 15 11 13 Programming Limitations and 11 16 11 13 1 Program limitation 11 16 11 13 2 Serial Port Limitations aS 11 16 11 14 Network Diagnostic g k u lane P e hive ho e 11 16 12 COMPILING AN OC APPLICATION u u u u u u uu u 12 1 1241 Compiler cies e ee 12 1 12 1 1 Running the Compiler sess nnns nnne nennen 12 2 12 1 2 Output Image unuq eene entente nennen tenens 12 4 11 3 Listing File InfortmatiOn l tic 12 4 121 4 Source Listing s e dr asd 12 4 12 1 5
15. I Local intranet E Figure 5 3 MICROLOK Object Controller Net Adapter WebTools Click on the Network Adapter Advanced Options link to move to the screen shown in Figure 5 4 5 4 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 AnsaldoSTS Object Controller Configuration Setup rn MICROLOK II Net Adapter Advanced Tools Network Settings Display network settings MLK Upload Reboot Digi Upload Upload niacfg ini or Executive or Application RAMO directory List RAMO directory FLASHO directory List FLASHO directory Erase Erases the FLASH File System 7 rT Figure 5 4 Net Adapter Advanced Tools Screen Click on Network Settings to view the OC s current settings See Figure 5 5 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 5 5 gt Object Controller Configuration Setup Z AnsaldoSTS Network Settings 2 MAC Address 00 40 9d 2b cb 57 IP Address 169 254 1 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 Server Address 0 0 0 0 Name Server0 0 0 0 0 Name Server1 0 0 0 0 Name Server2 0 0 0 0 MTU 0 Protocol 6 Configuration Status Good ClientTimeOut 3 600 BitRate 9600 HMAC O Server 0 0 0 0 Port 5840 KeyTimeout 2000 HM C KeyRetrys 3 IP 0 0 0 0 Port 12345 mi one a irn FF TF TFT No bem Figure 5 5 OC Network
16. u b EAR RICHER H3T1OH1NOO Loarao 3010H892IN nu SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 Object Controller N17700102 Front and Rear Panels Figure 3 2 3 4 7 AnsaldoSTS OC Configurations Table 3 3 Front Panel LED Operation Part Number N17700103 Figure 3 3 LED LED DESIGNATION COLOR PUNE NON HEALTH Green Indicates the OC s health this LED flashes at a rate of once per second when the unit is operating properly COM 1 TX Red Flashes to indicate that data being transmitted COM 1 RX Red Flashes to indicate that good data are being received Flashes to indicate that a good address and good data have 1 ERROR Red Indicates that there is an error with the received data COM 2 TX Red Flashes to indicate that data are being transmitted COM 2 RX Flashes to indicate that good data are being received Flashes to indicate that a good address and good data have COM 2 ERROR Indicates that there is an error with the received data User defined in the application software Indicates correct wiring between this port and a hub Ethernet Port LEDS anon The LED is ON when the wiring is good Turns ON at power up and turns OFF after approximately 1 Ethernet Port LEDs Green finite hen it reset IN 1 IN2 Indicates that Vital Inputs No 1 through No 4 are energized IN3 Green Power connectio
17. Link Timeout Interbyte timeout GPS Clock Recovery Window Dynamics Code Minimum Signal Maximum PDOP Position Latitude 39 11666 7000 00009 Position Longitude 94 6000000000002 Position Altitude 2020 Reset Changes Apply Defaults Java Applet Window Figure 9 2 GPS Protocol Link 9 1 1 4 GPS Master Protocol Link Statistics In the main menu click on the link labeled Link Information This will bring up a menu that will allow the user to view statistical information for communication To enter the Link Information view for a particular link simply click on the appropriate button See Figure 9 3 Figure 9 6 presents the GPS Protocol Link Statistics Display 9 4 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 AnsaldoSTS GPS MASTER Specifications LINK INFORMATION CPS Up Home RUN TIME MONITOR CLASSC_EMP l GPS MASTER Board Information Link Information Free Run Variable Display Serial Message Monitor HISTORICAL DATA User Data Log Event Log Error Log Event Error Code Look Up SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SET UP Set Clock Reset Unit Configuration Link Information 6 10 2008 11 16 AM NETWORK DIAGNOSTIC TOOL VERSION 1 30 N800306 0001 Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by ProvidedBY Union Switch 8 Signal Figure 9 3 Link Information Window SM 9494 Rev 7 February 201
18. NT T3NVd LNOHJ TOOL 83M WO9 L Woo 55 di NOLSNO S1HOd Nouvonaav Pe sda gasn H3TIOHLINOO 30 1OH9IN oo e oo o o o o o gjo o olo O oj ama M 589 T MOTI3A saa1indino SQ31 LNdNI SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 Object Controller N17700106 Front and Rear Panels Figure 3 5 3 10 7 AnsaldoSTS OC Configurations Table 3 5 Front Panel LED Operation Part numbers N17700107 Figure 3 6 and N17700108 Figure 3 7 LED LED DESIGNATION COLOR PONE NON HEALTH Green Indicates the OC s health this LED flashes at a rate of once per second when the unit is operating properly COM 1 TX Red Flashes to indicate that data being transmitted COM 1 RX Red Flashes to indicate that good data are being received Flashes to indicate that a good address and good data have 1 ERROR Red Indicates that there is an error with the received data COM 2 TX
19. 4 Vital Proximity Sensors 2 Analog Input 12 Via Out iD Seis See 6 LED Signal Drivers 1 Non Vital Input OC 4003 Port 1 TCP IP RJ 45 Figure 3 12 N17700117 e Port 2 Serial RS 232 DB9 J1 J2 J3 J4 6 Vital Outputs 6 LED Signal Drivers 1 Non Vital Input N17700118 1 Non Vital Output 6 Vital Inputs 6 Vital Outputs OC 12 Vital Inputs Port 1 TCP IP RJ 45 Figure 3 14 EOS 12 Vital Outputs Port 2 TCP IP RJ 45 4004 Figure 3 13 Port 1 TCP IP RJ 45 Port 2 TCP IP 45 J1 42 43 J4 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 3 1 OC Configurations 7 AnsaldoSTS Table 3 2 Front Panel LED Operation Part numbers 17700101 Figure 3 1 and N17700102 Figure 3 2 LED LED HEALTH Indicates the OC s health this LED flashes at a rate of once per second when the unit is operating properly ___ 17 Red Flashes to indicate that data are being transmitted ___ 18 _ Red Flashes to indicate that good data are being received __________ COM1MSGRCVD Red Flashes to indicate that a good address and good data have been received COMIERROR Red Indicates that there is an error with the received ___ 27 Red Flashes to indicate that data are being transmitted User defined in the application software Ethernet Port Indicates correct wiring between this port and a hub The LED is ON when the Yel
20. 88 1 BROADCAST INTERVAL 1000 Vital Adjustable CLASSC EMP MP 88 1 TEST INTERVAL 0 Vital Adjustable CLASSC 88 1 RADIO CONFIG STRING 0 Non vital Adjustable GPS MASTER GPS Master GPS MASTER Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable Point Point 1 Vital Adjustable Port 2 Vital Adjustable BAUD 9600 Non vital Adjustable StopBits 1 Non vital Adjustable Parity 1 Non vital Adjustable Key On Delay 0 Non vital Adjustable SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 14 29 Sample Listing File Key Off Delay 0 Non vital Adjustable Master Timeout 2000 msec Non vital Adjustable Polling Interval 1000 msec Non vital Adjustable Stale Data Timeout 300000 Vital Adjustable Link Timeout 60000 Non vital Adjustable Interbyte Timeout 0 msec Non vital Adjustable UTC Clock Recovery Window 3 Vital Adjustable Dynamics Code 4 Non vital Adjustable Minimum Signal 2 Non vital Adjustable Maximum PDOP 8 Non vital Adjustable Position Latitude 0 Vital Adjustable Position Longitude 0 Vital Adjustable Position Altitude 0 Vital Adjustable System Level Configuration Parameters ApplicationChecksum 0 Vital Adjustable ExecutiveChecksum 0 Vital Adjustable Executive Version 0 Fixed Application EXAMPLE compiled on Thu May 22 14 42 26 2008 CRC 3e02 Checksum 60ac Page 14 Application Version Event Threshold 1 Event Threshold 2 Event Threshold 3 Event Threshold 4 Event Thre
21. 10 15 Object Controller Reset Dialog Box 10 16 Typical Main Screen with Unit in CPS 10 17 Time Out Window siete eet 10 18 Typical Main Screen with Unit in Shutdown 10 19 System Configuration Dialog Box L 10 20 Typical System Configuration Display 10 21 General System Configuration U 10 23 Typical MIX Configuration Screen a aaa 10 25 Link Configuration Screen 0 U a 10 26 Network Diagnostic Tool Event Error Code Help 10 27 Typical Error Code Help Results sss enne 10 28 Unknown mr tiec rent rec rol eee te 10 28 Development System Block 11 1 Queuing Options Reference Diagram sse 11 4 Example of Front and Back Contact Assignments sse 11 5 Queuing Option Example 11 5 Conceptual Relay Model for Object Controller Programming 11 6 Conceptual Relay Model for Object Controller Programming
22. 1000105008 1405 YSN NI 80082 OS 193915 TIASSNY 99 5 HOLIMS IHJTIOHLNOO L19380 3OTOHOIN X N S XXO000000X N d m 9 9 9 07 8 HOLIMS NOINI 5 YOLOANNOO LNdNI 5 OILSONOVIG HOLIMS JJO NO L SNIA33 sq31 uasn sq31 TANNVHO sq31 TANNVHO WINOO TANVd LNOdd 1001 83M t Woo ssauqaqv di NOLSND TOOL 83M WOO 01 1 792 691 51408 1 T uod di 11nv3aq 55 OVW WOO v wasn wasn 2 1 1 wasn 5006596009650 O 40443 95 Woo 40443 S 0000 XL m 1 H3TIOHLNOO 19480 O O OJO o O O O O O O O
23. eee 5 9 5 6 2 Modify niacfg ini with the New Settings 5 13 5 6 3 Upload niacfg ini to the Object Controller sese 5 13 5 7 Network Adapter Advanced 5 16 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 iii w w Table of Contents 7 AnsaldoSTS 5 7 1 PEER Routing 24 2 40 11 1 eene nnne nene 5 16 5 8 Problems with the 5 17 5 8 1 Uploading New Digi Firmware l uu 5 17 5 9 Changing Network 05 5 17 6 ACQUIRING THE IP ADDRESS OC ETHERNET PORT 6 1 6 1 Changing a Port IP Address with the Digi Device Discovery Tool 6 2 6 2 Accessing the Network Diagnostic Tool U 6 5 7 UPLOADING A MICROLOK OC EXECUTIVE OR APPLICATION 7 1 8 NETWORK ADAPTER CONFIGURATION NIACFQi lNI I T 8 1 8 1 Factory WebTool niacfg ini 4 8 1 8 2 Factory Application Port niacfg ini 8 2 8 3 General Options tdeo iet 8 4 8 3 1 Option for the WebTool Mode
24. 1005 debug port address defi STATIONS FOR THIS LINK Press the station button to view change the station s data Peer Station 1 Peer Station 2 Done Default Reset Changes Java Applet Window Figure 10 24 Link Configuration Screen Each serial link that is identified in the application program must be properly configured for operation The OC system supports the operation of several types of serial links These include GENISYS and PEER protocol links Click on one of the Link Configuration selection buttons on the system configuration selection screen Something similar to the following appears a link enable and point to point section a physical port number baud rate stop bits and parity section a key on delay key off delay 10 26 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 5 AnsaldoSTS Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool master wait timeout polling interval stale data timeout and configuration address section a carrier mode secure CRC type and check back section and a Station 1 enable and Station 2 enable section 10 6 4 Event Error Code Help This link leads to a view in which the user enters a 16 digit hex event or error code number and receives help information Figure 10 25 The help text is a detailed description of the event or error 3 NETWORK DIAGNOSTIC TOOL VERSION 1 1 N800306 0001 Microsoft Internet Explorer EVENT ERROR CODE LOOK UP Vital Co
25. 11 7 Conceptual Relay Model for Object Controller Programming 11 7 ASSIGN Operators Truth aaan nnne 11 8 ASSIGN Operators and Order of Precedence Samples 11 9 ASSIGN Statement One sse esee entente enses nnns entren en 11 12 ASSIGN Statement 11 13 ASSIGN Statement Three esee nnne nennen nennen nnn entere 11 13 OC Serial Diagnostic Tool Main 12 1 Example File red de a e diee 12 2 DOS Command Line Navigation l 12 3 Compiler with Compiled Files nnne has 12 3 Typical Object Controller Application High Level 15 2 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 ix Table of Contents Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 3 5 Table 3 6 Table 3 7 Table 3 8 Table 3 9 Table 3 10 Table 3 11 Table 3 12 Table 3 13 Table 3 14 Table 3 15 Table 3 16 Table 3 17 Table 9 1 Table 9 2 Table 9 3 Table 9 4 Table 11 1 Table 11 2 Table 11 3 Table 11 4 Table 12 1 Table 15 1 Table 15 2 Table 15 3 Table 16 1 Table 17 1 A 77 AnsaldoSTS List of Tables MICROLOK Object Controller Part Numbers and Configurations 3 1 Front Panel LED
26. 13 2 Sample Applications 7 AnsaldoSTS ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 COMM LINK MII_PEER1 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 PROTOCOL MII PEER ADJUSTABLE PORT 1 ADJUSTABLE BAUD 38400 ADJUSTABLE STOPBITS 1 ADJUSTABLE PARITY NONE ADJUSTABLE KEY ON DELAY 0 ADJUSTABLE KEY OFF DELAY 0 ADJUSTABLE GRANT DELAY 10 MSEC ADJUSTABLE POINT POINT 1 ADJUSTABLE MII DEBUG PORT ADDRESS 0 VITAL STATION ADJUSTABLE MII ADDRESS 10 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 STATION NAME STATION 1 ADJUSTABLE PEER ADDRESS 20 ADJUSTABLE TIME STAMP 1 ADJUSTABLE ACK TIMEOUT 500 MSEC ADJUSTABLE HEARTBEAT INTERVAL 1000 MSEC ADJUSTABLE INDICATION UPDATE CYCLE 5 ADJUSTABLE STALE DATA TIMEOUT 3000 MSEC ADJUSTABLE CLOCK MASTER 1 OUTPUT MII 10 20 BO1 MII 10 20 BO2 MII 10 20 BO3 MII 10 20 BO4 INPUT 10 20 1 MII 10 20 BI2 MII 10 20 BI3 MII 10 20 BIA LINK PEER2 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 PROTOCOL MII PEER ADJUSTABLE PORT 2 ADJUSTABLE BAUD 38400 ADJUSTABLE STOPBITS 1 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Sample Applications ADJUSTABLE PARITY NONE ADJUSTABLE KEY ON DELAY 0 ADJUSTABLE KEY OFF DELAY 0 ADJUSTABLE GRANT DELAY 10 MSEC ADJUSTABLE POINT POINT 1 ADJUSTABLE MII DEBUG PORT ADDRESS 0 VITAL STATION ADJUSTABLE MII ADDRESS 20 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 STATION NAME STATION 2 ADJUSTABLE PEER ADDRESS 10 ADJUSTABLE TIME STAMP 1 ADJUSTABLE ACK TIM
27. 5 193 FIXED DEBUG_PORT_BAUDRATE 9600 194 ADJUSTABLE LOGIC_TIMEOUT 500 MSEC 14 20 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Sample Listing File 195 EVENT THRESHOLLD 39 2 196 197 LOQGIC BEGIN 198 199 ASSIGN 1 CPS ENABLE 1 200 201 ASSIGN VI0 0 TO 100 2 202 ASSIGN VIO 1 TO BIT 101 3 203 ASSIGN VI0 2 102 4 204 ASSIGN VI0 3 TO 103 5 205 ASSIGN 10 4 TO BIT 104 6 206 ASSIGN VI0 5 TO 154 7 207 NV ASSIGN 10 5 TO LED 1 8 208 209 ASSIGN VI1 0 TO 200 9 210 ASSIGN TO 201 10 211 ASSIGN VI1 2 TO 202 11 212 ASSIGN VI1 3 TO 203 12 213 ASSIGN VI1 4 TO 204 13 214 ASSIGN VI1 5 TO 254 14 215 NV ASSIGN VI1 5 TO LED 2 15 216 217 END LOGIC 218 219 END PROGRAM 220 Created on Thu May 22 14 42 26 2008 by Object Controller Compiler Version 1 30 N800302 0001 Application EXAMPLE compiled on Thu May 22 14 42 26 2008 CRC 3e02 Checksum 60ac Page 6 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 14 21 Sample Listing File Application Image Summary Target Object Controller Application Image CRC 3e02 Application Image Checksum 60ac Address Select Jumper Settings THESCC SCC 01234567 10000000 6 6 1 IN6 OUT6 01234567 01000000 6 6 2 IN6 OUT6 01234567 00100000 Unassigned User Defined Output Bits
28. Peer MII PEER1 Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable Point Point 1 Vital Adjustable Port 1 Vital Adjustable BAUD 38400 Non vital Adjustable StopBits 1 Non vital Adjustable 0 Non vital Adjustable Key On Delay 0 Non vital Adjustable Key Off Delay 0 Non vital Adjustable Debug Port Address Type 0 Fixed Debug Port Address 0 0 Fixed Grant Delay 10 Non vital Adjustable MII PEER1 STATION 270 Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable PEER1 STATION 270 TIME STAMP 1 Vital Adjustable PEER1 STATION 270 Station Address Type 1 Fixed PEER1 STATION 270 Station Address 17694720 Vital Adjustable PEER1 STATION 270 PEER ADDRESS 0 Vital Adjustable MII PEER1 STATION 270 Stale Data Timeout 30000 Vital Adjustable PEER1 STATION 270 ACK TIMEOUT 1000 Vital Adjustable PEER1 STATION 270 HEARTBEAT INTERVAL 2000 Vital Adjustable PEER1 STATION 270 INDICATION UPDATE CYCLE 2 Vital Adjustable PEER1 STATION 270 CLOCK MASTER 1 Vital Adjustable SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 14 49 200 Sample Listing File 77 AnsaldoSTS PEER1 STATION 270 UTC TIME STAMP 1 Vital Adjustable MII PEER1 STATION 10 Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable MII PEER1 STATION 10 TIME STAMP 1 Vital Adjustable MII PEER1 STATION 10 Station Address Type 1 Fixed MII PEER1 STATION 10 Station Address 655360 Vital Adjustable PEER1 STATION 10 PEER ADDRESS 0 Vital Adjustable MII PEER1 STATION
29. 38400 Bit rate of the Application Port PORT 60000 UDP Port unit accepts messages BROADCAST 1 Allow unit to send broadcasts LEARN 1 Allow unit to learn addresses sent by other units TTL 300 Time to Live for dynamic entry in seconds PAIR 1 0 Use only Peer address for routing logic 1 Use Peer and station addresses for routing logic UDP THHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHE Addresses are specified in the application as decimal Addresses are specified in this niacfg ini file as hexadecimal Examples Application niacfg ini 8 2 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 A E AnsaldoSTS Network Adapter Configuration niacfg ini Address 101 0065 Address 202 The format of entries in this section as follows lt target ip address gt lt target ip port gt lt MLK PEER address list The lt MLK PEER address list gt is a comma separated list of addresses NO SPACES ARE ALLOWED IN THE LIST A mix of MII and ATCS addressing schemes is OK Example 192 168 1 2 60000 002B 0022 34AAAA78 43AAAA78 if PAIR 1 then the pair must be present Example 192 168 1 16 60000 00CA 0065 PAIR 1 format HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH THHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHUE PEER1 Port 1 Destination IP address 192 168 1 16 which hosts MLK
30. SYSTEM VITAL IN SYSTEM VITAL IN SYSTEM VITAL IN 0 0 0 0 0 73 THEIN6OUT6 Input Enabled 1 0 0 0 0 74 THEIN6OUT6 Error 0 0 0 0 0 75 OUT 1 0 0 76 OUT 2 0 0 0 O 77 OUT 3 0 0 0 O 78 OUT 4 0 0 0 O 79 OUT 5 0 0 0 O 80 OUT 6 0 0 0 O 81 IN 1 1 0 0 0 82 IN 2 1 0 0 0 83 IN 3 1 0 0 0 84 IN 4 1 0 0 0 85 IN 5 1 0 0 0 86 IN 6 1 0 0 0 87 THEMIXIO Enabled 1 0 0 0 0 88 THEMIXIO Selective Shutdown 0 0 0 0 0 89 THEMIXIO Spare 1 0 0 0 0 0 90 THEMIXIO Spare 2 0 0 0 0 0 91 THEMIXIO Spare 3 0 0 0 0 0 92 THEMIXIO Input Enabled 1 0 0 0 0 93 THEMIXIO Error 0 0 0 0 0 94 THEMIXIO NV Analog Input Enabled 1 95 THEMIXIO NV Analog Input Valid 1 96 THEMIXIO NV Analog Input LED 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN SYSTEM VITAL IN SYSTEM NON IN 1SYSTEM NON OUT 97 THEMIXIO Proximity Sensor 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 14 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 98 THEMIXIO Proximity Sensor 1 Enabled SYSTEM VITAL IN 99 THEMIXIO Proximity Sensor 1 Indeterminate SYSTEM VITAL IN 100 THEMIXIO Proximity Sensor 2 SYSTEM VITAL IN 101 THEMIXIO Proximity Sensor 2 Enabled SYSTEM VITAL IN 102 THEMIXIO Proximity Sensor 2 Indeterminate SYSTEM VITAL IN Ay 77 AnsaldoSTS SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Sample Listing File 103 BO 1 0 0 0
31. gt 1000 Technology Drive Pittsburgh PA 15219 SM 9494 MICROLOK Object Controller ASTS USA Part No N177001 xx Installation Operation Copyright 201 1 SM 9494 Rev 7 Ansaldo STS USA Inc February 2011 4 AnsaldoSTS Notices Proprietary Notice This document and its contents are the property of Ansaldo STS USA Inc formerly known as Union Switch amp Signal Inc and hereinafter referred to as ASTS USA This document is furnished to you on the following conditions 1 That no proprietary or intellectual property right or interest of ASTS USA is given or waived in supplying this document and its contents to you and 2 That this document and its contents are not to be used or treated in any manner inconsistent with the rights of ASTS USA or to its detriment and are not to be copied reproduced disclosed or transferred to others or improperly disposed of without the prior written consent of ASTS USA Important Notice ASTS USA constantly strives to improve our products and keep our customers apprised of changes in technology Following the recommendations contained in the attached service manual will provide our customers with optimum operational reliability The data contained herein purports solely to describe the product and does not create any warranties Within the scope of the attached manual it is impossible to take into account every eventuality t
32. to 169 254 1 10 L x NA HTTP AWS Realm User name advanced x Password eee Remember my password NA HTTP AWS Realm User name Y Password Remember my password OK Cancel OK Cancel Figure 5 2 AWS Realm Logon Dialog Box Enter advanced for the username and objctl for the password SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 5 3 22 2 Object Controller Configuration Setup AnsaldoSTS 5 6 Main Web Page The main web page of the Network Adapter shows basic information It shows the part number of the unit Net Adapter WebTools N800306 0001 The line after that is the version number and the version specific part number After that it shows network information MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway The other buttons and the Network Adapter Advanced Options link are described in the next two sections MICROLOK Net Adapter Microsoft Internet Explo 181 xj File Edit Favorites ools 2 x 2 2 Search K Favorites Al 2 Address 4 http 169 254 1 10 M Links gt sagt Sy Union Switch amp Signal MICROLOK Object Controller Net Adapter Web Tools N800306 0001 1 30 2008 05 13 N800306 0130 UDPDB MAC Address 00 40 9d 2b cb 57 IP Address 169 254 1 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 Launch Network Diagnostic Tool Network Adapter Advanced Options
33. H3TIOHLINOO 3515 VSL 6 1 3OTOHOIN BI 51 437 MOTI3A e HOLO3NNOO a Laer H3MOd LNdNI e Ihe 91549 asna 1HOd OILSONDVIG SENADA e MOTI3A 2 e hole HOLIMS sq31 LNdLNO 0 ell 3JO NO 1HOd 9 4404 lt lt B Sq311fdNI i SNIA3M E q31N3385 371 MONIA XX A3u E L000L08008N s uasn ING Si G 997 1 41 0 5 Ue fui Goa SQ31 S E 4 0078000281 5 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 Figure 3 14 Object Controller N17700119 Front and Rear Panels 3 24 7 AnsaldoSTS OC Configurations 3 1 Connection Diagrams The various connection wiring schemes for the OC are shown in Figure 3 15 through Figure 3 24 NOTE Bi polar inputs require the use of 2 inputs and bi polar outputs require the use of 2 outputs OBJECT CONTROLLER 4 INPUTS 4 OUTPUTS 2 PROXIMITY SENSORS 1 ANALOG INPUT STANDARD Ji ISOLATED INPUTS ORANGE B120 AG f vy 1 2 o EA 2 Use primary lightning arresters INPUT 2 3 when operating equipment _ 4
34. VITAL 97 VO1 4 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL 98 VO1 5 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL 99 VI1 0 1 0 0 0 0 VITAL 100 VI1 1 1 0 0 0 0 VITAL 101 VI1 2 1 0 000 VIAL 102 VI1 3 1 0 0 0 0 VIAL SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 IN IN IN IN IN IN OUT OUT OUT OUT IN IN IN OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT IN IN IN IN Sample Listing File 14 25 Sample Listing File 103 VI1 4 1 0 0 104 1 5 2 0 0 105 CLASSC EMP Enabled 0 0 0 0 106 CLASSC EMP Disable Application EXAMPLE compiled on Thu May 22 14 42 26 2008 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL IN VITAL IN SYSTEM VITAL IN CRC 3e02 Checksum 60ac Page 10 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 107 CLASSC 88 0 Enabled 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 108 CLASSC 88 0 Status 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 109 CLASSC EMP MP 88 0 Inputs Received 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 110 CLASSC 88 0 Disable 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 111 CLASSC_EMP MP_88 1 Enabled 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 112 CLASSC_EMP MP_88 1 Status 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 113 CLASSC 88 1 Inputs Received 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 114 CLASSC 88 1 Disable 0 115 BIT 100 116 BIT 101 117 BIT 102 118 BIT 103 119 BIT 104 120 BIT 110 121 BIT 111 122 BIT 112 123 BIT 113 124 BIT 114 125 BIT 120 126 BIT 121 127 BIT 122 128 BIT 123 129 BIT 124 130 BIT 130 131 BIT 131 1
35. sqaq indino ven NI SV Whe 90062 95 5831 TANNVHO MM HOLIMS NOINN gaa b W004 40H 954 9 sh H3TIQHINOO 1 39NVHO ao 5091 TANNVHO WWOO 9 IN N3399 HOLOINNOO a d oaa Sq31 LNdNI 0 Hiway p ma H31T1OH1NOO 3504 vst 10350 i gt ji J X SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 Figure 3 13 Object Controller N17700118 Front and Rear Panels 3 22 7 AnsaldoSTS OC Configurations Table 3 9 Front Panel LED Operation Part number N17700119 Figure 3 14 LED LED DESIGNATION COLOR FUNCTION HEALTH Indicates the OC s health this LED flashes at a rate of once per second when the unit is operating properly _____ COMITX Red Flashes to indicate that data are being transmitted 0 _____ 1 ____ ___ Flashes to indicate that good data are being received COM1MSGRCVD Red Flashes to indicate that a good address and good data have been received COM1ERROR Red _ Indicates that there is an error with the received data ____ COM2TX Red Flashes to indicate that data are being transmitted ______ User defined in the application software Ethernet Port Yellow Indi
36. 117 MII 10 20 BO1 118 119 INPUT 120 MII 10 20 Bl1 121 122 123 124 BOOLEAN BITS 125 flash1 126 127 TIMER BITS 128 129 flash1 SET 2800 MSEC CLEAR 2800 MSEC 130 131 132 CONFIGURATION 133 SYSTEM 134 135 FIXED DEBUG_PORT_ADDRESS 1 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 14 37 Sample Listing File 77 AnsaldoSTS 136 FIXED DEBUG_PORT_BAUDRATE 9600 137 ADJUSTABLE LOGIC_TIMEOUT 1500 MSEC 138 APPLICATION VERSION 5 139 140 LOGIC BEGIN 141 142 ASSIGN 1 TO CPS ENABLE 2 Application GPS PEER TEST compiled on Thu Apr 09 15 27 52 2009 CRC 67 2 Checksum c4d9 Page 4 143 144 NV ASSIGN UTC CLOCK VALID LED 3 145 NV ASSIGN UTC CLOCK INVALID TO LED 4 147 ASSIGN flash1 TO flash1 149 ASSIGN flash1 TO MII 270 160 BO1 150 ASSIGN flash1 TO MII 10 20 BO1 14 38 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 A AnsaldoSTS Sample Listing File 152 NV ASSIGN MII 270 160 BO1 TO LED 1 153 NV ASSIGN MII 10 20 BO1 TO LED 2 154 155 END LOGIC 156 157 END PROGRAM 158 Created on Thu Apr 09 15 27 52 2009 by Object Controller Compiler Version 1 40 N800302 0001 Application Image Summary Target Object Controller Application Image CRC 67e2 Application Image Checksum c4d9 Address Select Jumper Settings SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 14 39 Sample Listing File THESCC SCC 01234567 10000000 THEMIXIO MIXIO 01234567 01000000 ay 77 AnsaldoSTS
37. 12 1 14 5 Usage Error Warning and unused bits Inefficient but no errors 4473 ASSIGN 4474 R580SNP 4475 R580SNK 407 WARNING Vital assign to non vital variable R580SNK inefficient 4476 This means the program compiled with all necessary files This program will operate but the compiler is warning of inefficient operations non vital statement is given a vital assign beginning SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 12 9 Compiling OC Application 7 AnsaldoSTS y AnsaldoSTS 12 10 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 A 7 AnsaldoSTS Sample Applications 13 SAMPLE APPLICATIONS 13 1 1 6 0 6 and MIX I O PCBs with PEER Serial Link Application OBJECT CONTROLLER PROGRAM SAMPLE OBJECT CONTROLLER APP SITE ID STRING PITTSBURGH LAB DATE STAMP JUNE 7 2006 INTERFACE LOCAL BOARD THESCC ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 TYPE SCC BOARD THEIN6OUT6 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 TYPE IN6 OUT6 OUTPUT OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 INPUT IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 BOARD THEMIXIO ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 TYPE MIXIO OUTPUT BO 1 BO 2 BO 3 BO 4 INPUT 1 812 BI 3 4 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 NV ANALOG INPUT 1 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 ADJUSTABLE MINIMUM THRESHOLD 12 2 0 0 30 0 ADJUSTABLE MAXIMUM THRESHOLD 16 7 0 0 30 0 PROXIMITY SENSOR 1 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 PROXIMITY SENSOR 2 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 13 1
38. 24 183 ASSIGN BI 3 BO 3 25 184 ASSIGN 814 BO 4 26 185 186 ASSIGN THEIN6OUT6 ENABLED g 27 187 ASSIGN THEIN6OUT6 INPUT ENABLED TO i 28 188 189 ASSIGN flash1 TO flash1 29 190 ASSIGN flash2 TO flash2 30 191 ASSIGN flash3 TO flash3 31 192 ASSIGN flash4 TO flash4 32 193 194 ASSIGN flash1 TO MII 10 20 BO1 33 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 14 5 Sample Listing File 195 34 196 35 197 36 198 199 37 200 38 201 39 202 40 203 204 41 205 42 206 43 207 44 208 45 209 210 46 211 47 212 48 213 49 214 215 216 217 218 50 219 51 220 221 222 223 224 225 ASSIGN flash2 TO MII 10 20 BO2 ASSIGN flash3 TO MII 10 20 BO3 ASSIGN flash4 TO MII 10 20 BO4 ASSIGN flash1 TO MII 20 10 BO1 ASSIGN flash2 TO MII 20 10 BO2 ASSIGN flash3 TO MII 20 10 BO3 ASSIGN flash4 TO MII 20 10 BO4 ASSIGN flash21 TO flash21 ASSIGN flash22 TO flash22 ASSIGN flash23 TO flash23 ASSIGN flash24 TO flash24 ASSIGN flash25 TO flash25 NV ASSIGN flash22 TO LED 1 NV ASSIGN flash23 TO LED 2 NV ASSIGN flash24 TO LED 3 NV ASSIGN flash25 TO LED 4 END LOGIC NUMERIC BEGIN AW 77 AnsaldoSTS BLOCK 1 TRIGGERS ON flash25 AND STALE AFTER 0 SEC EVALUATE 1 n21 END BLOCK END NUMERIC 14 6 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 A 7 AnsaldoSTS Sample Listing File 226 END PROGRAM Created o
39. 6 2 30 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 31 IN6 OUT6 32 33 OUTPUT VO1 0 VO1 1 VO1 2 VO1 3 VO1 4 VO1 5 34 35 INPUT VI1 0 VI1 1 VI1 2 VI1 3 VI1 4 VI1 5 36 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 37 38 39 COMM 40 41 LINK CLASSC_EMP Link name string 42 43 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 Enable the 44 CLASSC EMP link 45 PROTOCOL CLASSC EMP 8 f 46 Multiple links are 47 allowed 48 ADJUSTABLE PORT 1 1 2 No default Application EXAMPLE compiled on Thu May 22 14 42 26 2008 CRC 3e02 Checksum 60ac Page 2 49 ADJUSTABLE BAUD 9600 4800 9600 19200 50 38400 Dflt 9600 51 ADJUSTABLE STOPBITS 1 l 1or2 Dflt1 7 52 ADJUSTABLE PARITY NONE NONE ODD EVEN 7 53 MARK SPACE 54 Dflt NONE 55 ADJUSTABLE POINT POINT 1 0 1 56 ADJUSTABLE BROADCAST CHANGE 1 O0 1 DftoO 57 ADJUSTABLE NO RESPONSE TIMEOUT 1000 5 30 10000 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 14 17 Sample Listing File 5 77 AnsaldoSTS 58 Dflt 1000 2i 59 ADJUSTABLE EMP SOURCE ADDRESS 60 WIUxxxxxxxx wayside up com ASCII string 61 80 62 is shown 63 ADJUSTABLE EMP TYPE 20480 0 65535 64 20480 i 65 ADJUSTABLE LINK FAIL TIMEOUT 60000 MSEC 1000 60000 66 Dflt 60000 67 ADJUSTABLE 1 1 65535 Dflt 1 68 ADJUSTABLE MESSAGE VERSION
40. Dfit 1000 110 ADJUSTABLE TEST INTERVAL 0 MSEC 0 111 10000 3600000 112 Dflt 60000 113 Note that 114 disables the 115 test interval 116 1 9999 are 117 invalid 118 119 OUTPUT NOTE Only outputs 120 are supported 121 Any attempt to 122 define inputs 7 123 generates 124 error One to 125 30 output bits 7 126 may be defined 127 128 BIT 100 BIT 101 BIT 102 BIT 103 BIT 104 129 BIT 110 BIT 111 BIT 112 BIT 113 BIT 114 130 BIT 120 BIT 121 BIT 122 BIT 123 BIT 124 131 BIT 130 BIT 131 BIT 132 BIT 133 BIT 134 132 140 BIT 141 142 143 144 133 150 151 152 153 154 134 135 136 ADJUSTABLE WIU CHANNEL ADDRESS 2 137 138 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 139 CHANNEL NAME MP_88 1 140 ADJUSTABLE RADIO CONFIG STRING 141 00 00 F0 01 00 00 00 01 00 05 00 03 03 7A 00 142 00 00 F0 01 00 00 00 02 00 05 00 05 03 7A 00 143 ADJUSTABLE BROADCAST INTERVAL 1000 MSEC 144 ADJUSTABLE TEST INTERVAL 0 MSEC Application EXAMPLE compiled on Thu May 22 14 42 26 2008 CRC 145 146 147 148 3e02 Checksum 60ac Page 4 OUTPUT BIT 200 BIT 201 BIT 202 203 BIT 204 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 14 19 gt Sample Listing File 7 AnsaldoSTS 149 BIT 210 BIT 211 BIT 212 BIT 213 BIT 214 150 BIT 220 BIT 221 BIT 222 BIT 223 BIT
41. END NUMERIC SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 13 5 Sample Applications 7 AnsaldoSTS END PROGRAM 13 2 LED6 PCB and IN6 OUT6 PCB Application OBJECT_CONTROLLER PROGRAM IN6 OUT6_LED6_TEST APPL SITE ID STRING PITTSBURGH LAB DATE STAMP JANUARY 9 2007 INTERFACE LOCAL BOARD THESCC ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 TYPE SCC BOARD THELED6 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 TYPE LED6 OUTPUT SIGNAL OUTPUT 1 SIGNAL OUTPUT 2 SIGNAL OUTPUT 3 SIGNAL OUTPUT 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT 5 SIGNAL OUTPUT 6 SIGNAL GOOD SIGNAL GOOD 1 SIGNAL GOOD 2 SIGNAL GOOD 3 SIGNAL GOOD 4 SIGNAL GOOD 5 SIGNAL GOOD 6 NV OUTPUT NV OUT 1 NV INPUT NV IN 1 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 BOARD THEIN6OUT6 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 IN6 OUT6 OUTPUT OUT 1 OUT 2 0UT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 INPUT IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 BOOLEAN BITS 13 6 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 A 7 AnsaldoSTS Sample Applications flash1 flash2 flash3 flash4 flash5 a b c d e f g h outl out2 out3 out4 out5 out6 out7 out8 out9 out10 out11 out12 TIMER BITS flashi SET 500 MSEC CLEAR 500 MSEC flash2 SET 1 5 CLEAR 1 5 flash3 SET 2 SEC CLEAR 2 5 flash4 SET 5 SEC CLEAR 5 SEC flash5 SET 10 SEC CLEAR 10 SEC LOG BITS LOCAL 10 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM ADJUSTABLE DEBUG_PORT_ADDRESS 1 ADJUSTABLE DEBUG_PORT_BAUDRATE 9600 ADJUSTABLE LOGIC_TIMEOUT 1000 M
42. IN 5 77 AnsaldoSTS Application GPS PEER TEST compiled on Thu Apr 09 15 27 52 2009 CRC 67e2 Checksum c4d9 Page 7 84 THEMIXIO Proximity Sensor 2 Indeterminate 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 85 BO 1 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 86 BO 2 0 0 000 VIA OUT 87 BO 3 0 0 0 0 0 VIAL OUT 88 BO 4 0 0 000 VIAL OUT 89 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL IN 90 2 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL IN 91 BI 3 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL IN 92 4 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL IN 93 GPS_MASTER Enabled 14 44 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 ej 77 AnsaldoSTS 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 94 GPS_MASTER Disable 0 O 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 95 MII PEER1 Enabled 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 96 MII_PEER1 Disable 0 O 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 97 MIL PEER1 STATION 270 Enabled 0 O 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 98 MIL PEER1 STATION 270 Status 0 O 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 99 PEER1 STATION 270 Inputs Received 0 O 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 100 MIL PEER1 STATION 270 Disable 0 O 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 101 MIL PEER1 STATION 10 Enabled 0 O 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 102 MIL PEER1 STATION 10 Status 0 O 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 103 PEER1 STATION 10 Inputs Received 0 O 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 104 MIL PEER1 STATION 10 Disable 0 O 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 105 MII 270 160 BO1 1 0 0 0 0 1 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 Sample Listing File OUT OUT OUT OUT ASGN VITAL OUT 14 45 Sample Listing File 7 AnsaldoSTS 106 MII 270 160 BI1 0 0 00 0 VITAL IN 107 MII 10 20 BO1 1 0 0 0 0 1
43. Link Information 1 013 NETWORK DIAGNOSTIC TOOL VERSION 1 40 N800306 0001 Microsoft Internet Explorer Home RUN TIME MONITOR Board Information Link Information Free Run Variable Display Serial Message Monitor HISTORICAL DATA User Data Log Event Log Error Log Event Error Code Look Up SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SET UP jock Reset Unit Configuration DER LINK INFORMATION Get PPS Width messages sent 1 oet PPS Width messages sent 0 Good messages received 223617 messages received 0 Receiver version messages received 1 Receiver health messages received 10167 options reports received 1 Receiver configuration reports received 1 Secondary Receiver configuration reports received 1 INMEA Interval and Message Mask Output Message received 1 Packet broadcast mask reports received 1 Self survey reports received 1 Primary time reports received 101635 Secondary time reports received 101636 PPS characteristics reports received 1 IPPS width reports received 1 response error count 0 Hardware detected receive errors a complete message 0 Receiver overrun error count 0 Hardware error detected at interrupt level 0 Receieve buffer overflow error count 0 FIFO overflow error count 0 Escape error count 0 lancth arrar count n Clear Link Information 4 9 2009 6 00 PM Figure 9 5 Network Diagnostic Tool
44. S Ps 2005 L WOD gt ssaudav NOLSNO Q tcc tC ama 5 d31H3MOd 66 1001 83 8 P 5 5 m di 11nv4aa N YT ovw X WOO E XXXXX v SS34aav OVW L WOO 5 p 8 uasn O t O 5 pe WOO o 6 allo gt L noo HO sni O S a LNdNI 8 ES H311OH1NOOS 103780 E X icm LA 5 3 16 7 AnsaldoSTS OC Configurations Table 3 7 Front Panel LED Operation Part numbers N17700115 Figure 3 10 and N1770116 Figure 3 11 LED LED DESIGNATION COLOR PUNE NON HEALTH Green Indicates the OC s health this LED flashes at a rate of once per second when the unit is operating properly COM 1 TX Red Flashes to indicate that data are being transmitted COM 1 RX Red Flashes to indicate that good data are being received Flashes to indicate that a good address and good data have COM1ERROR Red Indicates that there is an error with the received data COM 2 TX Red Flashes to indicate that data are being transmitted COM 2 RX Flashes to indicate that good data are being received Flashes to indicate that a good address and good data h
45. 2206 0100 Object Controller Mixed I O Board 826 Output Bitstring start mismatch __ 2206 FF02 010 Object Controller Mixed Board B2b Invalid Board CPS Status Check 2206 FF03 0100 Object Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Input Bitstring start mismatch 2206 4 010 Object Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Invalid Application bit or numeric 2206 FF05 start mismatch Object Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Configuration data mismatch 2200 FF06 Object Controller Mixed I O Board Information Data W2x Address 2206 D4x Object Controller Mixed Board B3b Proximity D A step test reading out 2213 of range 27 Object Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Proximity Sensor failed Bypass 22 Power Monitor Diagnostics 2214 200 2001 Object Controller Mixed Board B2b Proximity Sensor failed Sensor 1 2213 2201 2001 Power Monitor Diagnostics Object Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Proximity Sensor failed Sensor 2 2213 Power Monitor Diagnostics 2001 Object Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Proximity Sensor failed 12V Monitor 2243 2001 Diagnostics Pe Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Proximity Sensor failed 10V Monitor 5543 2001 lagnostics Object Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Proximity Sensor failed Sensor 1 s 22 A D Sensor Monitor Diagnostics 2213 dius 2001 Object Controller Mixed Board B2b
46. 9 IVN9IS 9 HOLIMS NOINN L WOO 95 e z o xu MHOLO3NNOO H 5 x mw SQ31 TANNVHO WIAOO EE Bead SQ31 LNdNI 9 S 27 H 7 fS 35 4 YSL ir H TISS NONA H3110H1NO2 193r80 3031089IN H c xp S Figure 3 11 Object Controller 17700116 Front and Rear Panels SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 OC Configurations 7 AnsaldoSTS Table 3 8 Front Panel LED Operation Part numbers N17700117 Figure 3 12 and N1770118 Figure 3 13 LED LED DESIGNATION COLOR PUNE NON HEALTH Green Indicates the OC s health this LED flashes at a rate of once per second when the unit is operating properly COM 1 TX Red Flashes to indicate that data are being transmitted COM 1 RX Red Flashes to indicate that good data are being received Flashes to indicate that a good address and good data have COM1ERROR Red Indicates that there is an error with the received data COM 2 TX Red Flashes to indicate that data are being transmitted COM 2 RX Flashes to indicate that good data are being received Flashes to indicate that a good address and good data have User defined in the application software Rea COM2ERROR Red Indicates that there is an error with the received data LED s is ON when the wiring is good LED s minute when it r
47. ADJUSTABLE FIXED ENABLE FLAG Additional compiler defined bits board name gt RETEST LEDS Read Write Notes e NV INPUT The LED6 PCB has a non vital input that can be used like any standard MICROLOK II non vital input This input is included to provide the application designer an easy method to implement board name gt RETEST LEDS but it can be used for any non vital purpose the designer chooses An example of using the input to implement board name gt RETEST LEDS is presented in Section 13 2 SIGNAL GOOD The polarity of the SIGNAL GOOD system bit is SET when the OC diagnostics determine the signal to be working properly and CLEAR when they determine the signal to be faulty This is the opposite of the polarity for the LAMP OUT system bit used for LAMP16 signals SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 15 9 Application Program AnsaldoSTS Application logic should be written to always examine the SIGNAL GOOD system bit and to turn OFF a signal that has been detected by the OC diagnostics to be faulty Failure to do so may result in a signal that could appear as partially illuminated or intermittent which could cause problems This is similar to the way the LAMP OUT system bit must be used for lamps driven by the MICROLOK LAMP16 board Refer to ASTS USA Service Manual SM 6800D Appendix RETEST LEDS Setting this application bit 1 will clear the fault status and
48. ANSALDO SIGNAL MICROLOK OBJECT CONTROLLER UNION SWITCH amp SIGNAL 645 RUSSELL STREET BATESBURG SC 29006 MADE IN USA J1 J3 EXECUTIVE SOFTWARE N8003010001 REV XX POWER ON OFF FUSE 10A BATT 12VDC d 4 d 3 dito 45 d 1 O O 0 000 0 0 0 0000000 0000000000000000 J2 J4 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 Introduction WAGO INPUT CONNECTORS ORANGE WAGO OUTPUT CONNECTORS GRAY Figure 1 5 The Rear of the Object Controller SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 Introduction INPUT J1 LED s GREEN OUTPUT J2 LED s YELLOW YELLOW LED GREEN LED INPUT J3 LED s GREEN OUTPUT J4 LED s YELLOW CPS LED RED POWER LED BLUE A Me MICROLOK OBJECT CONTROLLER S HEALTH TX RX MSG pro COM 1 ERROR RX pro COM 2 ERROR USER 1 USER 2 COM 1 ADDRESS IXXXXX XXXXX DEFAULT IP FOR ALL ETHERNET PORTS
49. Application GPS PEER TEST compiled on Thu Apr 09 15 27 52 2009 CRC 67e2 Checksum c4d9 Page 5 Unassigned User Defined Output Bits 85 BO 1 86 BO 2 87 BO 3 88 BO 4 Unused User Defined Input Bits 89 BI 1 90 2 91 BI 3 14 40 OUTPUT BIT OUTPUT BIT OUTPUT BIT OUTPUT BIT INPUT BIT INPUT BIT INPUT BIT SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 77 AnsaldoSTS Sample Listing File 92 BI 4 INPUT BIT 106 MII 270 160 Bl1 INPUT BIT 108 10 20 81 INPUT BIT Unused or Unassigned Internal Bits None Found Bit Usage Summary CONTACT TIMES USED TYPE AS A TRIGGER NAME FRONT BACK BLOCK TABLE CODE ASGNS TARG VITALITY 1 RESET 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 2 QUICK RESET 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 3 KILL 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 4CPS ENABLE 0 0 0 0 1SYSTEM VITAL OUT 5CPSSTATUS 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 6 USER RESTRICTED 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 7 ERROR RESTRICTED SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 14 41 200 Sample Listing File 77 AnsaldoSTS 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 8 CONFIGURE ERROR 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 10 CLOCK FREEZE 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 11 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 12 PEER CLOCK SET 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 14LOG OK 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM NON IN 16LOG LARGE 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN Application GPS PEER TEST compiled on Thu Apr 09 15 27 52 2009 CRC 67e2 Checksum c4d9 Page 6 17LOG FULL 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 50 LED 1 0 0 0 0
50. Failure while in state and signal GOOD i Object Controller LED6 Board B2b LED Signal W6d Undefined State Failure while in ON state and signal FAILED ON 2604 0102 Object Controller LED6 Board B2b LED Signal W6d Undefined State 2604 2230 0103 Failure while in ON state and signal FAILED OFF Object Controller LED6 Board B2b LED Signal W6d Undefined State 2604 0104 Failure while in ON state and signal status undefined Object Controller LED6 Board 5826 LED Signal W6d Undefined State 2604 2230 0105 Failure while in OFF state and signal GOOD Object Controller LED6 Board 5826 LED Signal W6d Undefined State 2604 2230 0106 Failure while in OFF state and signal FAILED ON Object Controller LED6 Board 5826 LED Signal W6d Undefined State 2604 2230 0107 Failure while in OFF state and signal FAILED OFF Object Controller LED6 Board B2b LED Signal W6d Undefined State 29 Failure while OFF state signal status undefined 2604 0108 Controllo LED6 Board B2b LED Signal W6d Faulted while in the 2804 0200 connote LED6 Board B2b LED Signal W6d Faulted while in the 2604 0300 NS RPM LED6 Board B2b LED Signal W6d Repaired while in 2604 0401 21 LED6 Board B2b LED Signal W6d Repaired while 2604 0402 LED6 Board 5826 LED Signal W6d Repaired while in 2604 0501 Object Controller LED6 Board B2b Retest LEDs Activated FAILED signals 2605 2230 0600 0003 repaired
51. J1 pins 3 and 4 Refer to Figure 3 23 The LED6 PCB provides vital control of the signals turning them on and off as needed and monitors their health The LED6 Signal Driver PCB can also provide failed signal indication for the LED signals When the LED6 Signal Driver PCB is combined with ASTS USA LED s the system can provide True light out Detection The LED6 PCB part of the LED6 Signal Driver Package provides six vital outputs to control the LED signals These outputs are controlled by high side software controlled switches which connect and disconnect the output of the constant current regulators for the LED signals The LED6 PCB performs diagnostic and light out detection functions without the use of external check pulses When used in combination with the LED6 PCB an OFF state ASTS USA LED signal will have a load voltage of approximately 2 5V This voltage level is normal and is present because OFF state diagnostics are being performed by the control system The diagnostic and light out detection functions of the LED6 PCB do not use external check pulses For both ON and OFF state LED Signals a check pulse will never be seen at the load The LED6 PCB will detect shorts between signals that cause an incorrect signal state If the return leads of any two or more signals are shorted together the system will not indicate an error because this is a legal wiring option If the controlled lead of two or m
52. PAIR 0 This option specifies that routing is based on the full source destination pair This is used when multiple locations has the same source address so the only way to uniquely identify where each message should go is to use both the source and destination addresses as a pair 8 3 3 UDP Options Entries in this section are specified as lt local_port gt lt remote_ip_addr gt lt remote_port gt lt mlk_addr_list gt remote_ip_addr is the Internet address of the remote unit where the MLK addresses listed in the mlk addr list reside remote port is the Internet port of the remote unit where the MLK address listed in the mlk addr list reside mlk addr list is specified as lt mlk_addr gt lt mlk_addr_list gt mlk addr is specified as mlk dest addr mlk source addr The Microlok Addresses has to be in 4 digit Hexadecimal notation For example Address 10 maps to 000A and Address 20 maps to 0014 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 8 5 Network Adapter Configuration niacfg ini 7 AnsaldoSTS Example 192 168 1 16 60000 000A 192 178 1 17 60000 0014 In the application ml2 file PROTOCOL MII PEER ADJUSTABLE PORT 1 ADJUSTABLE MILADDRESS 10 STATION NAME STATION_1 ADJUSTABLE PEER ADDRESS 20 This definition defines a MII PEER port and a station The station address is 10 and the address it is communicating with is address 20 So messages sent from the station has a source address of 10
53. SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 10 7 Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool 7 AnsaldoSTS NETWORK DIAGNOSTIC TOOL VERSION 1 1 N800306 0001 Microsoft Internet Explorer ni x FREE RUN VARIABLE DISPLAY Home RESET 0 1 CHANGE INIT end of Active Symbols Timestamp of the addition 02 10 18 00 01 CHANGE NOMON Link Information RESET 1 RUN TIME MONITOR Board Information Free Run Variable Display Serial Message Monitor HISTORICAL DATA User Data Log Event Log Error Log Event Error Code Look Up SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SET UP Set Clock Reset Unit Configuration Polling Interval Freeze Free Variable Run 1 1 2007 5 20 AM oft Figure 10 9 Filtered Free Run Variable Display 10 8 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 AnsaldoSTS Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool The Freeze Resume and Clear buttons at the bottom of the display window affect the displayed data for all of the monitored variables Freeze prevents all of the variables data from updating This feature gives you a snapshot of the variable status After you have paused the display the Freeze button changes to Resume You then can click on the Resume button to resume the dynamic updating of the variable bit data The Freeze button also stops the real time scrolling text and allows the user to scroll up and down in the text This allows the
54. error One to 30 output bits may be defined BIT 100 BIT 101 BIT 102 BIT 103 BIT 104 BIT 110 BIT 111 BIT 112 BIT 113 BIT 114 BIT 120 BIT 121 BIT 122 BIT 123 BIT 124 BIT 130 BIT 131 BIT 132 BIT 133 BIT 134 BIT 140 BIT 141 BIT 142 BIT 143 144 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 13 11 Sample Applications A 77 AnsaldoSTS BIT 150 BIT 151 BIT 152 BIT 153 BIT 154 ADJUSTABLE WIU CHANNEL ADDRESS 2 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 CHANNEL NAME MP_ 88 1 ADJUSTABLE RADIO CONFIG STRING 00 00 FO 01 00 00 00 01 00 05 00 03 03 7A 00 00 00 FO 01 00 00 00 02 00 05 00 05 03 7A 00 ADJUSTABLE BROADCAST INTERVAL 1000 MSEC ADJUSTABLE TEST INTERVAL 0 MSEC OUTPUT BIT 200 BIT 201 BIT 202 BIT 203 BIT 204 BIT 210 BIT 211 BIT 212 BIT 213 BIT 214 BIT 220 BIT 221 BIT 222 BIT 223 BIT 224 BIT 230 BIT 231 BIT 232 BIT 233 BIT 234 BIT 240 BIT 241 BIT 242 BIT 243 BIT 244 BIT 250 251 BIT 252 253 254 LINK GPS_MASTER ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 PROTOCOL GPS MASTER ADJUSTABLE PORT 2 ADJUSTABLE BAUD 9600 ADJUSTABLE STOPBITS 1 ADJUSTABLE PARITY ODD Link name string Enable the GPS MASTER link Type 7 1 2 No default 4800 9600 19200 38400 Dflt 9600 1or2 Dflt1 NONE ODD EVEN MARK SPACE Dflt ODD ADJUSTABLE STALE DATA TIMEOUT 300000 MSEC 5000 60
55. 1 Vital Adjustable THEMIXIO NV Analog Input Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable THEMIXIO Minimum Threshold 122 Non vital Adjustable THEMIXIO Maximum Threshold 167 Non vital Adjustable THEMIXIO Proximity Sensor 1 Enabled 0 Vital Adjustable THEMIXIO Proximity Sensor 2 Enabled 0 Vital Adjustable SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 14 47 Sample Listing File 7 AnsaldoSTS Link Summary GPS MASTER GPS Master GPS MASTER Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable Point Point 1 Vital Adjustable Port 2 Vital Adjustable BAUD 9600 Non vital Adjustable StopBits 1 Non vital Adjustable Parity 1 Non vital Adjustable Key On Delay 0 Non vital Adjustable Key Off Delay 0 Non vital Adjustable Master Timeout 2000 msec Non vital Adjustable Polling Interval 800 msec Non vital Adjustable Stale Data Timeout 350000 Vital Adjustable Link Timeout 60000 Non vital Adjustable Application GPS PEER TEST compiled on Thu Apr 09 15 27 52 2009 CRC 67e2 Checksum c4d9 Page 9 Interbyte Timeout 0 msec Non vital Adjustable UTC Clock Recovery Window 4 Vital Adjustable Dynamics Code 4 Non vital Adjustable Minimum Signal 2 Non vital Adjustable Maximum PDOP 8 Non vital Adjustable Position Latitude 0 Vital Adjustable 14 48 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 A 7 AnsaldoSTS Sample Listing File Position Longitude 0 Vital Adjustable Position Altitude 0 Vital Adjustable PEER1
56. 1 2 Safety Read and thoroughly understand this manual before attempting any of the procedures listed herein Pay particular attention to CAUTION and These headings appear throughout this manual Caution statements indicate conditions that could cause damage to equipment Warning statements indicate conditions that could cause personal physical harm serious injury or loss of life Always observe standard precautions familiar to trained electrical technicians when working on this equipment Always adhere to all safety regulations stipulated by the railroad 1 3 Acronyms e GPS Global Positioning System e HMAC dHash keyed Message Authentication Code e IE Internet Explorer Microsoft OC Object Controller e TCP Transmission Control Protocol UDP User Datagram Protocol MICROLOK is a registered trademark of Ansaldo STS USA Inc SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 1 1 A Introduction 77 AnsaldoSTS 1 4 System Components The 18 shipped totally assembled and is ready to install directly from the factory Inside the shipping container you will find 1 The MICROLOK Object Controller 2 WAGO Connectors for inputs outputs and power 3 CD containing MICROLOK Object Controller Manual SM 9494 and associated software See Section 5 1 Figure 1 1 MICROLOK Object Controller 1 2 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 e 77 AnsaldoSTS Introduction Rear Front Figure 1 2 The Front and Rear of the MICRO
57. 10 Voltage less than 0V negative Current between 150 ma and 0 ma 3 2 3 3 LED Fault Detection Light Out The LED signal system follows the AREMA Guidelines for LED signals The system repeatedly monitors the status signals connected to the LED6 board On state status signals are monitored for opens and short circuits between each signal s leads Off state status signals are monitored for continuity of the leads to the signal and short circuits between each signal s leads Faulty ON or OFF state signals are detected in one second Flashing signals can take up to two seconds to detect since the system is separately monitoring the ON and OFF states Once a signal has been determined to be faulty the OC system will log a warning and clear the faulty signal s SIGNAL GOOD application bit 0 The OC front panel LEDs yellow corresponding to the faulty signal will begin flashing This flashing pattern is three quick on pulses followed by a longer off period This distinguishes a faulty signal from a normally flashing signal When any of the six LED6 outputs detects a faulty signal the green fault LED on the front panel will also turn on This LED quickly draws the maintainer s attention to boards with faulty signals 3 44 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 w 7 AnsaldoSTS OC Configurations NOTE Note that the SIGNAL GOOD bit is set 1 state when its attached signal is detected as good and clear 0 state when its signal is d
58. 169 254 1 10 CUSTOM IP ADDRESS COM 1 COM 2 WEB TOOL 77 AnsaldoSTS HEALTH LED GREEN COMM CHANNEL 1 LED s RED COMM CHANNEL 2 LED s RED USER DEFINED LED s RED pes APPLICATION PORTS YELLOW LED GREEN LED YELLOW LED DIAGNOSTIC PORT GREEN LED Figure 1 6 The Front of the MicRoLok Object Controller SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 77 AnsaldoSTS Description 2 DESCRIPTION The main features of the OC are e The OC offers the flexibility of combining bi polar and discrete inputs outputs into a variety of configurations e The OC includes a unit health LED green indicator on the SCC PCB which gives a clear and visible indication of the unit s status e The OC is totally self contained and is a line replaceable unit LRU This allows for quick easy replacement in the field All the components of the OC are contained within a ruggedized standard package e The entire OC including all communication ports is electrically isolated from the battery to 2000 volts e The OC has up to two 2 TCP IP application ports COM 1 and COM 2 for vital and non vital MICROLOK PEER protocol communication e The OC has a TCP IP diagnostic port WEB TOOL for maintenance communication e The OC s optional serial RS 232 DB9 port is fully compatible with all MICROLOK II protocols The OC offers the following benefits to the user
59. 25 INPUT BI 1 812 BI 3 814 26 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 27 28 NV ANALOG INPUT 1 29 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 30 ADJUSTABLE MINIMUM THRESHOLD 12 2 0 0 30 0 31 ADJUSTABLE MAXIMUM THRESHOLD 16 7 0 0 30 0 32 33 PROXIMITY SENSOR 1 34 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 0 35 36 PROXIMITY SENSOR 2 37 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 0 38 39 40 41 42 COMM SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 14 33 Sample Listing File 77 AnsaldoSTS 43 44 LINK GPS_MASTER 45 46 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 47 PROTOCOL GPS MASTER 48 ADJUSTABLE PORT 2 Application GPS PEER TEST compiled on Thu Apr 09 15 27 52 2009 CRC 67e2 Checksum c4d9 Page 2 49 ADJUSTABLE BAUD 9600 50 ADJUSTABLE STOPBITS 1 51 ADJUSTABLE PARITY ODD 52 ADJUSTABLE STALE DATA TIMEOUT 350000 MSEC 53 ADJUSTABLE LINK TIMEOUT 60000 MSEC 54 ADJUSTABLE MASTER TIMEOUT 2000 MSEC 55 ADJUSTABLE POLLING INTERVAL 800 MSEC 56 ADJUSTABLE UTC CLOCK RECOVERY WINDOW 4 57 ADJUSTABLE INTERBYTE TIMEOUT 0 MSEC 58 ADJUSTABLE DYNAMICS CODE 4 59 ADJUSTABLE MINIMUM SIGNAL 2 0 60 ADJUSTABLE MAXIMUM PDOP 8 0 61 ADJUSTABLE POSITION LATITUDE 40 43389623281269 62 ADJUSTABLE POSITION LONGITUDE 79 9674354574159 63 ADJUSTABLE POSITION ALTITUDE 201 832884109579 64 ADJUSTABLE POINT POINT 1 14 34 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 77 AnsaldoSTS Sample Listing File 65 66 67 LINK PEER1 68 69 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 70 PROTOCOL MII PEER 71 ADJUSTABLE
60. 75 VOO 0 OUTPUT BIT 76 VOO 1 OUTPUT BIT 77 VO0 2 OUTPUT BIT 78 VOO 3 OUTPUT BIT 79 00 4 OUTPUT BIT 80 VOO 5 OUTPUT BIT 93 VO1 0 OUTPUT BIT 94 VO1 1 OUTPUT BIT 95 VO1 2 OUTPUT BIT 96 VO1 3 OUTPUT BIT 97 VO1 4 OUTPUT BIT 98 VO1 5 OUTPUT BIT 120 BIT 110 OUTPUT BIT 121 BIT 111 OUTPUT BIT 122 BIT 112 OUTPUT BIT 123 BIT 113 OUTPUT BIT 124 BIT 114 OUTPUT BIT 125 BIT 120 OUTPUT BIT 126 BIT 121 OUTPUT BIT 127 BIT 122 OUTPUT BIT 128 BIT 123 OUTPUT BIT 129 BIT 124 OUTPUT BIT AN 77 AnsaldoSTS Application EXAMPLE compiled on Thu May 22 14 42 26 2008 14 22 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 gt 7 AnsaldoSTS CRC 3e02 Checksum 60ac Page 7 130 BIT 130 OUTPUT BIT 131 BIT 131 OUTPUT BIT 132 BIT 132 OUTPUT BIT 133 BIT 133 OUTPUT BIT 134 BIT 134 OUTPUT BIT 135 BIT 140 OUTPUT BIT 136 BIT 141 OUTPUT BIT 137 BIT 142 OUTPUT BIT 138 BIT 143 OUTPUT BIT 139 BIT 144 OUTPUT BIT 140 BIT 150 OUTPUT BIT 141 BIT 151 OUTPUT BIT 142 BIT 152 OUTPUT BIT 143 BIT 153 OUTPUT BIT 150 BIT 210 OUTPUT BIT 151 BIT 211 OUTPUT BIT 152 BIT 212 OUTPUT BIT 153 BIT 213 OUTPUT BIT 154 BIT 214 OUTPUT BIT 155 BIT 220 OUTPUT BIT 156 BIT 221 OUTPUT BIT 157 BIT 222 OUTPUT BIT 158 BIT 223 OUTPUT BIT 159 BIT 224 OUTPUT BIT 160 BIT 230 OUTPUT BIT 161 BIT 231 OUTPUT BIT 162 BIT 232 OUTPUT BIT 163 BIT 233 OUTPUT BIT 164 BIT 234 OUTPUT BIT 165 BIT 240 OUTPUT BIT 166 BIT 241 OUTPUT BIT 167 BIT 242 OUTPUT BIT 168 BIT 243 OUTPUT BIT 169 BIT 244 OUTPUT BIT
61. 90082 28 193918 TIASSNY 979 TWNOIS HOLIMS NOINN H3TIOHLNOO 193 XOTOHIIN X N S X000000XX N d TWNDIS 001 8 E HOLO3NNOO LNdNI asna 1 HOLIMS 440 NO SLYOd SQq31 TANNVHO sq31 14 3339 T TANVd LNOYS TOOL L WOD ssauqqav di WOLSND 1001 83M WOO 51408 5 8 wasn z wasn t wasn 8031 H3Sf1 7 WOO L WOO qm v2 3000XX 13N43H13 TIY di D ooljooojoooloop 5 L WOO 95 xu 95 xu H3TIOHINOO 1o3rao 3010U2IN cool oo ooolooop ama 431 5890 MOTI3A sq31 1nd1no N33u5 SQq31 LNdNI MOTI3A sqan11nd1no SQq
62. A typical COM port niacfg ini file is shown in Section 5 6 1 5 6 1 Typical niacfg ini Com Port File This is the niacfg ini configuration file Comments go from to end of line The order of options does not matter as long as the option is in the correct section GENERAL IP 169 254 1 10 IP Address of unit NETMASK 255 255 0 0 Network mask GATEWAY 0 0 0 0 Gateway MODE 1 0 WebTool 1 PEER Routing 2 MultiCast BIT_RATE 38400 Bit rate THHEHEHEHEHHHHHHHHBHHHHBHBHBHBHEHEHBHHHHBHBHHBHBHBHBHBHEHBHBHHHBHHBHHBHE PEER Routing Options THHHEHHHHHHHBHHHHHHHHBHHHBHHHHHHHBHHBHHHHBHHBHHHHBHHBHHHBHHHHBHHBHBHBE PORT 60000 UDP Port unit accepts messages BROADCAST 1 Allow unit to send broadcasts SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 5 9 _ Object Controller Configuration Setup 7 AnsaldoSTS LEARN 1 Allow unit to learn addresses sent by other units TTL 300 Time to Live for dynamic entry in seconds PAIR 1 0 Use only Peer address for routing logic 1 Use Peer and station addresses for routing logic UDP
63. Application Image Identification 12 5 12 1 6 1 Board Address Jumper Settings 12 5 12 1 7 Unassigned Unused Variable Summary sse 12 6 12 1 8 Bit Usage Summary oen dte ae dr pacte van ode aaa il sexe uda 12 6 12 1 9 Numeric Usage Summary sse ener enne nnns 12 6 12 1 10 Board S mmani S 12 7 tatti COMM ENK SUMMARY 12 7 12 1 12 System Level Configurable Parameters 12 7 12143 Gompiler Ghecks 12 7 12 1 14 Debugging Typical Compiler 12 8 13 SAMPLE APPLICATIONS 3 irr deca 13 1 13 1 IN6 OUT6 and MIX I O PCBs with PEER Serial Link Application 13 1 13 2 LED6 PCB and IN6 OUT6 PCB 13 6 13 3 GPS MASTER CLASSC EMP Example 13 9 13 4 GPS MASTER MII PEER Example 13 14 14 SAMPLE LIS TING FILE face dace ite aaa aq h sassa 14 1 14 4 Sample Listing File mrss 14 1 14 2 GPS MASTER CLASSC EMP Example Program 14 16 14 3 GPS MASTER MIL PEER Example Program sse 14 32 15 EXAMINI
64. File V Always ask before opening this type of file symbolTable mle File r r r Figure 5 7 Saving niacfg ini Once saved the file can be opened in an application such as Notepad and viewed See Figure 5 8 niacfg ini Notepad File Edit Format View GENERAL 1 169 254 1 10 NETMASK 255 255 0 0 G RTEU Y B 0 0 0 MODE 8 RRTE 9688 CLIENT TIME OUT 3688 IP fiddress of unit Network mask Gateway WebTool 1 PEER Routing When WebTool is inactive for this time This is the niacfg ini configuration file Comments go from to end of line The order of options does not matter as long as the option is the correct section in Bit rate of the pplication s Debug Port Cin seconds gt the connection will close tni Col 1 Figure 5 8 WebTool niacfg ini File Figure 5 8 shows typical WebTool port niacfg ini file 5 8 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 AnsaldoSTS Object Controller Configuration Setup Usually when installing a new OC the only change necessary for a WebTool port is an IP address chanee COM ports may require additional changes
65. Vital Adjustable THEINGOUTS Selective Shutdown 0 Fixed THEINGOUTS Input Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable THEMIXIO MIXIO THEMIXIO Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable THEMIXIO Selective Shutdown 0 Fixed THEMIXIO Input Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable THEMIXIO NV Analog Input Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable THEMIXIO Minimum Threshold 122 Non vital Adjustable THEMIXIO Maximum Threshold 167 Non vital Adjustable THEMIXIO Proximity Sensor 1 Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable THEMIXIO Proximity Sensor 2 Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable Link Summary SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 14 13 Sample Listing File 7 AnsaldoSTS MII_PEER1 MII Peer MII PEER1 Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable Point Point 1 Vital Adjustable Port 1 Vital Adjustable BAUD 38400 Non vital Adjustable StopBits 1 Non vital Adjustable Parity 0 Non vital Adjustable Key On Delay 0 Non vital Adjustable Key Off Delay 0 Non vital Adjustable Debug Port Address Type 0 Fixed Debug Port Address 0 0 Fixed Grant Delay 10 Non vital Adjustable Mil_PEER1 STATION_1 Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable PEER1 STATION 1 TIME STAMP 1 Vital Adjustable PEER1 STATION 1 Station Address Type 1 Fixed PEER1 STATION 1 Station Address 655360 Vital Adjustable PEER1 STATION 1 PEER ADDRESS 0 Vital Adjustable PEER1 STATION 1 Stale Data Timeout 3000 Vital Adjustable PEER1 STATION 1 ACK TIMEOUT 500 Vital Adjustable PEER1 S
66. W2x Address 2506 D4x 2227 2227 2227 Unknown LED6 t Code WOx W2x W4x W6x 2 J j Object Controller LED6 Board B2b Delivery Task Entry Echo t 2601 0100 Object Controller LED6 Board B2b Delivery readback t 2601 0200 0001 Object Controller LED6 Board B2b Delivery readback t W4x W6x 2601 2220 Object Controller LED6 Board B2b Verification Task Entry Echo t 2601 0100 Object Controller LED6 Board B2b Diagnostics Task Entry Echo t 2601 0100 Object Controller LED6 Board B2b Read Task Echo t 2601 Object Controller LED6 Board B2b Initialization Task Type Register t 22 W6x should be 0x0024 2602 Object Controller LED6 Board B2b Delivery Task Register t W6x 22 should be 0x0024 2002 7220 0100 Object Controller LED6 Board B2b Verification Task Type Register t 22 W6x should 0x0024 26025 d 22290 0108 Object Controller LED6 Board B2b Diagnostics Task Type Register t 99 W6x should be 0 0024 AAO Object Controller LED6 Board 5826 Read Task Type Register t W6x 2602 0100 should be 0x0024 Object Controller LED6 Board B2b Read Task Non Vital Input is Bad 2603 0001 0100 Object Controller LED6 Board B2b Read Task Non Vital Input is Unstable 2603 0001 Object Controller LED6 Board B2b Read Task Non Vital Input Good 2603 0001 0300 Object Controller LED6 Board B2b LED Signal W6d Undefined State 2604 2230 0101
67. e Because of its compact design the OC fits into the typical 16 x 16 x 8 wayside junction box This flexibility allows the user to eliminate a relay house or full size case thus reducing application costs e The OC which is TCP IP compatible will connect to a local IP network it utilizes a fully integrated TCP IP stack and is compatible with commercial off the shelf communication products e The OC uses web based tools which enable a maintainer to monitor and or troubleshoot the unit with only a computer and a standard web browser e The status of the OC is shown via LEDs on the front panel of the case The OC is available in a variety of configurations Table 3 1 based on its specific application SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 2 1 Description 77 AnsaldoSTS 5 AnsaldoSTS 2 2 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS OC Configurations 3 OC CONFIGURATIONS Table 3 1 MicRoLok Object Controller Part Numbers and Configurations MODEL PART COMMUNICATION WAGO NUMBER NUMBER UC CONEIGURA TION CONFIGURATION CONNECTOR Mix I O OC 1001 4 Vital Inputs Port 1 TCP IP RJ 45 Figure 3 1 N17700101 4 Vital Outputs Port 2 Serial RS 232 DB9 J1 J2 2 Vital Proximity Sensors 1 Analog Input Mix I O 4 Vital Inputs OC 1002 Port 1 TCP IP RJ 45 17700102 4 Vital Outputs J1 42 Figure 3 2 2 Vital Proximity Sensors Port 2 TCP IP RJ 45 1 Analog Input Mix I O 8 Vital Inputs oes N17700103 8 Vital Outputs
68. equipment external of the case A N451552 0101 Low Voltage Arrester Z N451552 0201 High Voltage Arrester OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 5 OUTPUT 6 STANDARD OUTPUTS 3 THROUGH 6 Part numbers 17700111 17700112 do not use 72 Figure 3 20 Bipolar Inputs and Outputs for Part Numbers N17700105 N17700106 N17700111 and N17700112 3 30 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 4 AnsaldoSTS OBJECT CONTROLLER 12IN 120UT I O CONNECTOR WIRING STANDARD ISOLATED INPUTS A J1 ORANGE N12 case INPUT 1 AN INPUT 2 Use primary lightning L arresters when operating equipment external of the INPUT 3 INPUT 4 M451552 0101 Low Voltage Arrester N 451552 0201 High Voltage Arrester INPUT 6 STANDARD J2 ISOLATED OUTPUTS GRAY OQUTPUT I Use primary lightning arresters when operating equipment external of the case AN N451552 0101 Low Voltage Arrester ZA 451552 0201 High Voltage Arrester lt N OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 5 OUTPUT 6 IWF d fe a OC Configurations STANDARD J3 ISOLATED INPUTS ORANGE INPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 9 INPUT 10 INPUT 11 INPUT 12 STANDARD J4 ISOLATED OUTPUTS GRAY OUTPUT 7 OUTPUT 8 OUTPUT 9 OUTPUT 10 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 12 Figure 3 21 Standard
69. i 4 AnsaldoSTS 4 Object Controller 17700101 Front and Rear Panels 3 3 Figure 3 1 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 77 AnsaldoSTS OC Configurations JANVd MOV TANVd LNOHJ ii d N ED S SN KG m YOLOANNOO G 1001 83 o O lt E T 8504 1HOd ani HOS y HOLO3NNOO INdLNO 4AO NO 8 Ssauaav OVW u LH 1404 lt lt sonia SNIA3M XX ABH qatu 9 1000106008N Sq313NIJ3G 5 4 lt 1408 SAILNO3XS i MOTI3A WOO Q 8837 LNd1NO eae acne SQ312 13NNVHO in ol s 3 E RUPEM E 8837 LAdNI
70. 0 0 1 VITAL OUT 104 BO 2 0 0 0 0 0 1 ASGN VITAL OUT 105 BO 3 0 0 0 0 0 1 ASGN VITAL OUT 106 BO 4 0 0 0 0 0 1 VITAL OUT 107 1 1 0 0 0 0 VITAL IN 108 Bl 2 1 0 0 0 0 VITAL IN 109 BI 3 1 0 0 0 0 VITAL IN 110 4 1 0 0 0 0 VITAL IN 111 PEER1 Enabled 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 112 MII_PEER1 Disable 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 113 MII PEER1 STATION 1 Enabled 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 114 PEER1 STATION 1 Status 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 115 PEER1 STATION 1 Inputs Received 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 116 PEER1 STATION 1 Disable 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 117 MII 10 20 BO1 0 0 0 0 0 1 ASGN VITAL OUT 118 MII 10 20 BO2 0 0 0 0 0 1 ASGN VITAL OUT 119 MII 10 20 BO3 0 0 0 0 0 1 ASGN VITAL OUT 120 MII 10 20 BO4 0 0 0 0 0 1 ASGN VITAL OUT 121 MII 10 20 Bl1 0 0 0 0 0 VIA IN 122 MII 10 20 BI2 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL IN 123 MII 10 20 BI3 0 0 0 0 0 VIA IN 124 MII 10 20 Bl4 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL IN 125 PEER2 Enabled 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 126 PEER2 Disable 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 127 PEER2 STATION 2 Enabled 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 128 PEER2 STATION 2 Status 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 129 MIl_PEER2 STATION_2 Inputs Received 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 130 MII PEER2 STATION 2 Disable 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 131 MII 20 10 BO1 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 14 11 Sample Listing File AnsaldoSTS 0 0 0 0
71. 0 1 132 MII 20 10 BO2 0 0 0 0 0 1 133 MII 20 10 BO3 0 0 000 1 134 MII 20 10 BO4 0 0 000 1 135 20 10 1 VITAL OUT ASGN VITAL OUT ASGN VITAL OUT ASGN VITAL OUT 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL IN 136 20 10 12 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL IN 137 MII 20 10 BI3 0 0 0 0 0 VIA IN 138 MII 20 10 Bl4 0 0 0 00 VIA IN 139 0 0 0 0 0 1 ASGN VITAL INT 140 b 0 0 0 0 0 VIAL INT 141 0 0 0 0 0 1 ASGN VITAL INT 142 d 0 0 0 0 0 1 VITAL INT 143 e 0 0 0 0 0 1 VITAL INT 1441 0 0 0 0 0 1 ASGN VITAL INT 145 9 0 0 0 0 0 1 ASGN VITAL INT 146 h 0 0 0 0 0 VIA INT 147 i 0 0 0 0 0 1 ASGN VITAL INT 148 flash1 2 1 0 0 0 1 ASGN VITAL INT 149 flash2 2 1 0 0 1 ASGN VITAL INT 150 flash3 2 1 0 0 0 1 ASGN VITAL INT 151 flash4 2 1 0 0 0 1 ASGN VITAL INT 152 flash21 0 1 0 0 1 ASGN VITAL INT 153 flash22 1 1 0 0 0 1 ASGN VITAL INT 154 flash23 1 1 0 0 1 ASGN VITAL INT 155flashaa 1 1 0 0 1 ASGN VITAL INT 156 flash25 1 1 1 0 0 1 ASGN VITAL INT 157 EVALUATE MATH ERROR 1 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL INT Numeric Usage Summary NAME MINIMUM MAXIMUM ERROR INITIAL EVAL TARGET VITAL 158 CLOCK MONTH 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 159 CLOCK DAY 160 CLOCK YEAR 161 CLOCK HOUR OUT 162 CLOCK MINUTE OUT 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT SYSTEM VITAL OUT SYSTEM VITAL 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 14 1
72. 0 1SYSTEM NON OUT 51 LED 2 0 0 0 0 0 1SYSTEM NON OUT 52 LED 3 0 0 0 0 0 1SYSTEM NON OUT 53 LED 4 0 0 0 0 0 1SYSTEM NON OUT 60CPS RESET 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 61 UTC CLOCK INVALID 1 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 62 UTC CLOCK VALID 1 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 65 THESCC Enabled 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 14 42 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 77 AnsaldoSTS 66 THESCC Selective Shutdown 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM 67 THESCC Spare 1 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM 68 THESCC Spare 2 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM 69 THEMIXIO Enabled 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM 70 THEMIXIO Selective Shutdown 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM 71 THEMIXIO Spare 1 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM 72 THEMIXIO Spare 2 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM 73 THEMIXIO Spare 3 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM 74 THEMIXIO Input Enabled 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM 75 THEMIXIO Error 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM 76 THEMIXIO NV Analog Input Enabled 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM 77 THEMIXIO NV Analog Input Valid 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM 78 THEMIXIO NV Analog Input LED SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 VITAL VITAL VITAL VITAL VITAL VITAL VITAL VITAL VITAL VITAL VITAL NON Sample Listing File 14 43 Sample Listing File 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM NON OUT 79 THEMIXIO Proximity Sensor 1 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 80 THEMIXIO Proximity Sensor 1 Enabled 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 81 THEMIXIO Proximity Sensor 1 Indeterminate 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 82 THEMIXIO Proximity Sensor 2 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 83 THEMIXIO Proximity Sensor 2 Enabled 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL
73. 1 1 255 Dflt1 69 ADJUSTABLE WIU ADDRESS SIZE 24 16 32 Dflt 24 70 ADJUSTABLE MESSAGE TYPE SIZE 6 4 16 Dft6 71 ADJUSTABLE MESSAGE VERSION SIZE 4 4 8 Dflt4 72 ADJUSTABLE MESSAGE DATA SIZE 64 64 184 Dflt 64 73 ADJUSTABLE MESSAGE DIGEST SIZE 32 32 160 Dflt 32 74 ADJUSTABLE ENCRYPTED KEY 75 EB 1F AO 2E B9 08 83 72 C7 F1 24 FE 62 2D D6 1C CO 89 F8 40 5 36 F4 2D 76 8 64 hexidecimal 77 bytes 78 Unspecified bytes 79 filled with O s 80 No dflt Must be 81 specified 82 83 ADJUSTABLE WIU CHANNEL ADDRESS 1 U_INT32 No dflt 84 Address is 85 specified 86 decimal number 87 Up to 3 addresses 88 may be specified 89 within a single 90 link 91 92 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 0 1 Nodflt 93 CHANNEL NAME MP_ 88 0 Channel 94 string 95 96 ADJUSTABLE RADIO CONFIG STRING Application EXAMPLE compiled on Thu May 22 14 42 26 2008 CRC 3e02 Checksum 60ac Page 3 97 00 00 FO 01 00 00 00 01 00 05 00 01 03 7A 00 98 Upto 4 string 99 segments each 100 010 32 v 101 hexadecimal bytes 102 inlength 103 Default is the 14 18 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Sample Listing File 104 NULL string 105 106 107 108 ADJUSTABLE BROADCAST INTERVAL 1000 500 60000 109
74. 1 89 ADJUSTABLE PARITY NONE 90 ADJUSTABLE KEY ON DELAY 0 91 ADJUSTABLE KEY OFF DELAY 0 92 ADJUSTABLE GRANT DELAY 10 MSEC 93 ADJUSTABLE POINT POINT 1 94 ADJUSTABLE MII DEBUG PORT ADDRESS 0 95 96 VITAL STATION 97 ADJUSTABLE MII ADDRESS 20 98 99 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 100 STATION NAME STATION 2 101 ADJUSTABLE PEER ADDRESS 10 102 ADJUSTABLE TIME STAMP 1 103 104 ADJUSTABLE ACK TIMEOUT 500 MSEC 105 ADJUSTABLE HEARTBEAT INTERVAL 1000 MSEC 106 ADJUSTABLE INDICATION UPDATE CYCLE 5 107 ADJUSTABLE STALE DATA TIMEOUT 3000 MSEC 108 ADJUSTABLE CLOCK MASTER 1 109 110 OUTPUT 111 MII 20 10 BO1 MII 20 10 BO2 MII 20 10 BO3 MII 20 10 BO4 112 113 INPUT 114 20 10 1 MII 20 10 BI2 MII 20 10 BI3 20 10 814 115 116 117 BOOLEAN BITS 118 b d h i 119 flash1 flash2 flash3 flash4 120 flash21 flash22 flash23 flash24 flash25 121 122 NUMERIC VARIABLES 123 n1 n2 n3 n4 n5 n6 n7 n8 n9 n10 n11 n12 124 n21 n22 125 126 TIMER BITS 127 128 flashi SET 500 MSEC CLEAR 500 MSEC 1 129 flash2 1600 MSEC CLEAR 1600 MSEC 2 130 3 2700 MSEC CLEAR 2700 MSEC 5 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 14 3 Sample Listing File 7 AnsaldoSTS 3 131 flash4 3800 MSEC CLEAR 3800 MSEC 4 132 133 21 5 1 SEC CLEAR 1 SEC 5 134 flash22 5 SEC CLEAR 5 5 6 135 flash23 SET 8 S
75. 1 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 15 2 5 The Interface Section COMM Sub Section CAUTION When setting the BAUD for the Application Ports DEBUG PORT BAUDRATE for the Web Tool port be sure to also adjust the BIT RATE in the Network Interface configuration niacfg ini file for that port 15 2 5 4 Communication Link Definition Section Refer to Section 3 5 2 Communication Link Definition Section in SM 6800D and to Section 4 Application Logic Changes Network Protocol in SM 6800K Note these general points The OC supports serial communication links e The user may define up to two serial communication links e The serial communication links must be configured so that POINT POINT is set to 1 e The COMM declaration heads the Communication Section of the OC application program The MICROLOK PEER Protocol Station definition now contains the UTC TIME STAMP option It can be enabled 1 or disabled 0 just as the TIME STAMP option is This option is used to transmit UTC Clock Initialization parameters Stale Data Time Out and Recovery Window and the UTC Time Stamp data to a unit that is connected to a Class C EMP data radio and to allow the unit s UTC Clock to have the correct time Only Object Controller Units that utilize the GPS Master Communication Protocol should enable the UTC TIME STAMP option The UTC Time Stamp data will only be included in Vital messages Non Vital Stations will not have this data p
76. 1 Table 3 1 Table 3 9 Figure 3 14 Section 10 6 3 Section 11 9 and Table 17 1 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 AnsaldoSTS Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 INTRODUCTION cance cect 1 1 1 12 QQ Mean aiaia 1 1 1 0 oa Fate Chana Paq 1 1 1 1 44 System Components Uu u ee ii ea te ie 1 2 1 5 Identifying the 1 3 1 5 1 Object Controller Part Number 17700119 00 1 3 1 6 Installation Requirements S aS ii ek 1 4 1 6 1 ee i 1 4 1 6 2 Site Pr paration ca e MA 1 5 1 6 3 MOUNTING tt Ee ptt RH 1 5 2 DESCRIPTION eee cs 2 1 3 OG CONFIGURATIONS u L 3 1 3 1 Connection Diagrams U enr sensi nenn 3 25 3 1 1 Ethernet Port Pin Orientation 3 35 3 152 Power Connections sis Pe et 3 35 3 1 3 RS 232 DB 9 Pin Assignments 3 38 3 2 Specifications uet adt eve be HO RUBER ex 3 38 3 2 1 I O Board Specifications asss 3 39 2 2 2 Proximity SernsOfS
77. 10 Stale Data Timeout 30000 Vital Adjustable PEER1 STATION 10 ACK TIMEOUT 1000 Vital Adjustable PEER1 STATION 10 HEARTBEAT INTERVAL 2000 Vital Adjustable PEER1 STATION 10 INDICATION UPDATE CYCLE 2 Vital Adjustable MII PEER1 STATION 10 CLOCK MASTER 1 Vital Adjustable MII PEER1 STATION 10 UTC TIME STAMP 0 Vital Adjustable System Level Configuration Parameters ApplicationChecksum 0 Vital Adjustable Application GPS PEER TEST compiled on Thu Apr 09 15 27 52 2009 CRC 67e2 c4d9 Page 10 ExecutiveChecksum 0 Vital Adjustable Executive Version 0 Fixed Application Version 5 Fixed Event Threshold 1 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 2 1 Non vital Adjustable 14 50 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 77 AnsaldoSTS Event Threshold 3 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 4 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 5 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 6 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 7 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 8 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 9 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 10 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 11 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 12 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 13 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 14 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 15 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 16 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 17 1 Non vital
78. 12 1 Application File Default Address and Size APPLICATION BASE MAXIMUM TYPE ADDRESS SIZE Object Controller 0x000B0000 050000 12 1 3 Listing File Information Refer to Section 4 5 Listing Information in SM 6800D Note these general points concerning the listing file mll e The listing file provides information about compiler generated information in the application as well as reports about usage of various resources defined in the application e The listing shows the date of compilation and the version number and date of the compiler e Can be used for bit identification when using the Serial Diagnostic Tool 12 1 4 Source Listing Refer to Section 4 5 1 Source Listing in SM 6800D Note these general points e The source listing shows warnings severe warnings and errors plus it shows relevant statement numbers assigned by the compiler e The warnings and errors are interspersed between the source listing lines if they exist 12 4 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 AnsaldoSTS Compiling an OC Application Each line of the source listing has this form lt line number gt lt text of original source line gt lt statement number gt If a line does not have an associated statement number the lt statement number gt portion will appear blank Lines with statement numbers are those with e ASSIGN e NV ASSIGN e EVALUATE e NV EVALUATE e JF statements e TIMERS The compiler generates statem
79. 170 BIT 250 OUTPUT BIT 171 BIT 251 OUTPUT BIT 172 BIT 252 OUTPUT BIT 173 BIT 253 OUTPUT BIT Unused User Defined Input Bits None Found Unused or Unassigned Internal Bits SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 Sample Listing File 14 23 Sample Listing File 7 AnsaldoSTS None Found Application EXAMPLE compiled on Thu May 22 14 42 26 2008 CRC 3e02 Checksum 60ac Page 8 Bit Usage Summary CONTACT TIMES USED TYPE AS A TRIGGER BIT NAME FRONT BACK BLOCK TABLE CODE ASGNS TARG VITALITY 1 RESET 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 2 QUICK RESET 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 3 KILL 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 4CPS ENABLE 0 0 0 0 1SYSTEM VITAL OUT 5CPS STATUS 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 6 USER RESTRICTED 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 7 ERROR RESTRICTED 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 8 CONFIGURE ERROR 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 10 CLOCK FREEZE 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 11 CLOCK SET 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 12 PEER CLOCK SET 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 14 LOG OK 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM NON IN 16LOG LARGE 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 17LOG FULL 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 50 LED 1 0 0 0 0 0 1SYSTEM NON OUT 51 LED 2 0 0 0 0 0 1SYSTEM NON OUT 52 LED 3 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM NON OUT 53 LED 4 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM NON OUT 60CPS RESET 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 61 UTC CLOCK INVALID 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 62 UTC CLOCK VALID 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 65 THESCC Enabled 0 0 0 0 0 SYS
80. 2007 November 2007 Minor editorial changes Added Section 13 on the LED6 PCB Added information for the HMAC option for the niacfg ini file Incorporated ECO 140228 7 which added the Sections 4 4 2 1 Clear Link Statistics 4 4 3 1 Variable Bit Filtering and 4 4 4 Serial Message Monitor Minor editorial changes Corrected Figure 2 20 figure was wrong June 2008 Incorporate ECO 140309 1 which updates Object Controller compiler and network diagnostic tool Sections 2 2 3 2 2 6 8 and 9 were updated Section 13 LED6 Signal Driver Board was removed August 29 2008 Revised Section 3 4 and 5 for text and graphics 4 b September 5 2008 Revisions per FTR comments September 15 2008 Revisions per FTR field comments Revised Section 6 Added Section 7 Revised Figure 5 6 Revised Figure 10 4 Added Figure 5 11 Added Figure 5 12 Added Figure 6 6 Added Figure 7 1 Added Figure 7 2 Added Figure 7 3 Added Figure 7 4 Added Figure 7 5 Added Figure 7 6 Added Figure 10 1 Added Figure 10 2 Added Figure 10 3 Added Figure 12 1 Added Figure 12 2 Added Figure 12 3 Added Figure 12 4 Revised Section 17 Parts List to Optional Parts List September 19 2008 Release Revision May 2009 Revised Section 5 8 1 Figure 9 1 Figure 9 4 and Section 15 2 5 1 Added Section 13 4 and Section 14 3 February 2011 Revised for part number N17700119 Section 1 5
81. 224 151 BIT 230 BIT 231 BIT 232 BIT 233 BIT 234 152 BIT 240 BIT 241 BIT 242 BIT 243 BIT 244 153 BIT 250 BIT 251 BIT 252 BIT 253 BIT 254 154 155 156 LINK GPS MASTER Link name string 157 158 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 Enable the 159 GPS MASTER link 160 PROTOCOL GPS MASTER Type 7 Ji 161 ADJUSTABLE PORT 2 1 2 No default 162 ADJUSTABLE BAUD 9600 4800 9600 19200 163 38400 Dflt 9600 164 ADJUSTABLE STOPBITS 1 10r2 Dflt1 165 ADJUSTABLE PARITY ODD NONE ODD EVEN 7 166 MARK SPACE 167 Dflt ODD 168 ADJUSTABLE STALE DATA TIMEOUT 300000 MSEC 5000 600000 169 Dflt 300000 170 ADJUSTABLE LINK TIMEOUT 60000 MSEC 5000 60000 171 Dflt 60000 Ki 172 ADJUSTABLE MASTER TIMEOUT 2000 MSEC 30 10000 173 Dflt 1100 f 174 ADJUSTABLE UTC CLOCK RECOVERY WINDOW 3 3 30seconds 175 dflt 3 seconds 176 ADJUSTABLE INTERBYTE TIMEOUT 0 MSEC 0 100 Dflt 0 177 ADJUSTABLE DYNAMICS CODE 4 1 4 014 178 ADJUSTABLE MINIMUM SIGNAL 2 0 2 0 10 0 7 179 Inc 1 0 Dflt 2 0 180 FLOAT 181 ADJUSTABLE MAXIMUM PDOP 8 0 4 0300 7 182 Inc 1 0 8 0 183 FLOAT 184 185 ADJUSTABLE 1 0 1 01 186 187 188 CONFIGURATION 189 190 SYSTEM 191 192 FIXED DEBUG_PORT_ADDRESS 1 Application EXAMPLE compiled on Thu May 22 14 42 26 2008 CRC 3e02 Checksum 60ac
82. 7 February 2011 V 7 AnsaldoSTS Application Programming Table 11 3 Compilier Defined Time of Day Bits SYSTEM NUMERIC APPLICATION NUMERIC FUNCTION NAME ACCESS CLOCK MONTH Read Write Month of year 1 12 CLOCK DAY Read Write Day of month 1 31 CLOCK YEAR Read Write Year 0 99 CLOCK HOUR Read Write Hour of day 0 23 CLOCK MINUTE Read Write Minute of hour 0 59 CLOCK SECOND Read Write Second of minute 0 59 The hardware making up the system clock is non vital therefore all of the system bits associated with the system clock are non vital and should not be used in vital equations 11 10 Reserved Words Reserved words are alphanumeric phrases that have a special meaning to the OC compiler The words shown in Table 11 4 cannot be used as program variables SM 9494 Rev 7 February 20011 77 AnsaldoSTS Application Programming Table 11 4 Reserved Words RESERVED WORDS FOR THE OC COMPILER ADDRESS AFTER ASSIGN BEGIN BLOCK CAB FREQUENCY CLEAR CODER OUT CONSTANT DEBUG PORT ADDRESS E TRACK END EVEN FIX FROM GENISYS SLAVE IN8 OUT8 INPUT INTERFACE KEY ON DELAY LAMP16 LOCAL LOGIC TIMEOUT MASTER MICROLOK MICROTRAX MODE NONE NUMERIC INPUT ASSIGN NV IN32 OUT32 NV NUMERIC INPUT NVB OUT12 ON OUTPUT PARITY PORT PROTOCOL RESTART TIMER SECTION SHARED RAM SLOT STALE DATA TIMEOUT STOPBITS TABLES TIMER TRACK TRACKB TRX TRACK UNDERRANGE ADJ AND ATTRIBUTES B
83. 81034A2800040004 47030A0200000001 8105002001000000 8403000D00002222 8103000000020006 9834020000002502 9836020000002501 9837020001021802 9834010000002502 9836010000002501 9834010000001002 5833010000001002 8103054434300002 MII Peer Physical Link Up Serial link PE MII Peer Station Up Serial link PEER_2 MII Peer Invalid acknowledge received 8 MII Peer Physical Link Up Serial link MII Peer Station Up Serial link PEER_2 MII Peer Physical Link Up Serial link PE MII Peer Physical Link Fail Serial link R System Reset Reset Completed System Reset CPS DOWN System Bit Card not found internal RAM only Configuration warning saved configura System Reset CPS UP CPS Keys state Executive event Invalid timestamp time Reset from diagnostic cps clear fla MII Peer Physical Link Up Serial link PE MII Peer Station Up Serial link PEER_2 MII Peer Invalid acknowledge iced MII Peer Physical Link Up Serial link P MII Peer Station Up Serial link PEER_2 MII Peer Physical Link Up Serial link MII Peer Physical Link Fail Serial link System Reset Reset Completed Reload Figure 10 14 10 6 System Adjustment Setup Help 1 24 2007 9 54 AM System Error Log This link sets the clock on the OC using the current PC time or a user specified time 10 6 1 1 The Set Time of Day Clock Display Figure 10 15 sets the OC s clock Set Time of Day Clock
84. Address 202 192 168 1 10 60000 00 HEHE HH TCP This section is similar to UDP The difference is each connection has its own host port number The format of entries in this section are as follows lt host ip port gt lt target ip address gt lt target ip port gt lt MLK PEER address list gt Example 60001 192 168 1 10 60000 00CA 60002 192 168 1 11 60010 0002 HMAC 5 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 8 3 Network Adapter Configuration niacfg ini AnsaldoSTS HMAC adds a message authentication protocol on top of the PEER protocol A Key Server is required for this function to work When HMAC is enabled all messages are sent encapsulated with the HMAC protocol HMAC 0 0 HMAC disabled 1 HMAC enabled SERVER 0 0 0 0 HMAC Key Server IP address PORT 5840 HMAC Key Server IP port KEY TIMEOUT 2000 Time in seconds between HMAC Key heartbeat messages KEY RETRYS 3 Number of missed heartbeats before key is declared invalid
85. Adjustable Event Threshold 18 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 19 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 20 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 21 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 22 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 23 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 24 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 25 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 26 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 27 1 Non vital Adjustable SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 Sample Listing File 14 51 200 Sample Listing File 77 AnsaldoSTS Event Threshold 28 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 29 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 30 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 31 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 32 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 33 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 34 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 35 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 36 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 37 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 38 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 39 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 40 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 41 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 42 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 43 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 44 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 45 1 Non vital Adjustable Application GPS PEER TEST compiled on Thu Apr 09 15 27 52 2009 CRC 67e2 Checksum
86. Connector Pin Assignments PIN 1 PIN 2 PIN 3 PIN 4 PIN 5 PIN 6 PIN 7 PIN 8 TXD TXD RXD EPWR EPWR RXD EPWR EPWR Transmit Transmit Receiver Power from Power from Receive Power from Power from Data Data Data Switch Switch Data Switch Switch 3 36 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS OC Configurations POWER CONNECTOR J ORANGE PINS 1 amp 2 AND PINS 3 amp 4 CONNECTED INTERNAL TO OBJECT CONTROLER BATTERY INPUT 9 8V 16 2V BATTERY INPUT 9 8V 16 2V Note Secondary battery surge protection not required WAGO CONNECTOR lt EXTERNAL WIRING BREAK OFF PROPER KEYING PINS BEFORE INSTALLING ON OBJECT CONTROLLER EXAMPLE OF J 1 SHOWN WITH TABS REMOVED FROM BETWEEN PINS 2 3 AND 14 15 VO CONNECTOR KEYING LOCATION See Figure 1 5 for Key Positions Figure 3 26 Power and WAGO Connectors SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 3 37 gt OC Configurations 7 AnsaldoSTS 3 1 3 RS 232 DB 9 Pin Assignments The pin assignments for the RS 232 DB 9 connector is shown in Figure 3 27 and Table 3 11 5 43 2 1 SOCKET OR FEMALE DB 9 CONNECTOR ON OBJECT CONTROLLER 9 8 7 6 Figure 3 27 85 232 DB 9 Pin Assignments Front View Table 3 11 RS 232 DB 9 Pin Assignments PIN FUNCTION 2 ___ __8 TXD X TrasmitData 4 NoComecion 8 CIS OQlea
87. IVNBIS H 1IAS NOIN 193f80 3OTONSIN TANNVHO ININOO Q31H L1V3H 7 TANVd LNOtid TOOL 83M Woo ss3uaav di Wo1sno OVW TOOL 83M 8 WOO suno 90 2100 012179527691 81408 TY di 11nv43a LNI 9 NI SNI OVW L WOO vwasn O z xual e asn zwasn O O ino uou lo zano ino WOO xa LN IO uvas HO 7 BSW O L WOO xu LNI bee H3TIOHLNOO 193 0 O o OO o O O O O O O o P oolooolo ool oop e d31H3MOd agy 549 MOTI3A 97 LAdLNO N3399 sq311 dNI MOTI3A sqa11nd1no sda LAdNI Object Controller N17700103 Front and Rear Panels 3 7 Figure 3 3 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 gt OC Configurations 7 AnsaldoSTS Table 3 4 Front Panel LED Operation Part numbers N17700105 Figure 3 4 and N17700106 Figure 3 5 LED LED DESIGNATOR CO
88. Inputs and Outputs for Part Numbers N17700107 N17700108 and N17700119 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 3 31 OC Configurations 7 AnsaldoSTS OBJECT CONTROLLER 6 BIPOLAR INPUTS AND 2 BIPOLAR OUTPUTS WITH 8 STANDARD OUTPUTS J1 J3 BLPOLAR INPUTS GRANGE BEPOLAR INPUTS ORANGE 10N 2 ON FAN 2016 7 ON 8 7 8 ON Use primary lightning arresters when operating equipment external of the case AN N451552 0101 Low Voltage Arrester N451552 0201 High Voltage Arrester 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Q N BI POLAR BI POLAR OUTPUT OUTPUT 7 ON 3 8 ON Use primary lightning arresters when operating equipment external of the case N451552 0101 Low Voltage Arrester AA M451552 0201 High Voltage Arrester OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 5 OUTPUT 6 STANDARD OUTPUTS STANDARD OUTPUTS 3 THROUGH 6 9 THROUGH 12 Figure 3 22 Bipolar Inputs and Outputs for Part Numbers N17700107 N17700108 and N17700119 3 32 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 A 7 AnsaldoSTS OC Configurations NOTE In Figure 3 23and Figure 3 24 there is only one Signal Output that is displayed The remaining five Signal Outputs are wired in the same manner J1 ORANGE BATTERY 9 8 16 2V CPS OUT 1 REGULATOR CPS OUT 2 CPS OUT 3 CPS OUT 4 CPS OUT 5 CPS OUT 6 LED C
89. Link Information Free Run Variable Display Serial Message Monitor HISTORICAL DATA User Data Log Event Log Error Log Event Error Code Look Up SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SET UP Set Clock Reset Unit Configuration Type Time EVENT LOG Code 3 Down Event event event event event event event Warning event event event Warning event event event event event event event event event Warning event 01 23 09 58 25 02 AM 01 23 09 58 25 02 AM 01 23 09 58 25 01 AM 01 23 09 58 25 01 AM 01 23 09 58 25 01 AM 01 23 09 58 25 00 AM 01 23 09 58 04 00 AM 01 23 09 57 50 00 AM 01 23 09 57 50 00 AM 01 23 09 57 47 00 AM 01 23 09 57 47 00 AM 01 23 09 57 45 00 AM 01 23 09 57 42 05 AM 01 23 09 57 42 05 AM 01 23 09 41 48 02 AM 01 23 09 41 48 02 AM 01 23 09 41 48 01 AM 01 23 09 41 48 01 AM 01 23 09 41 48 01 AM 01 23 09 41 48 00 AM 01 23 09 41 27 00 AM 01 23 09 41 13 00 AM 04123 00 41 12 00 AM 9834020000002502 9836020000002501 9837020001021802 9834010000002502 9836010000002501 9834010000001002 5833010000001002 810305 34300002 8105002002000001 81034A2800040004 47030 0200000001 8105002001000000 8403000D00002222 8103000000020006 9834020000002502 9836020000002501 9837020001021802 9834010000002502 9836010000002501 9834010000001002 5833010000001002 8103054434300002 A MII Peer Physical Link Up Serial link PE MII Peer Station Up Serial link PEER_2 MII Peer Invalid acknowledge
90. Mixed Board B2b Proximity Sensor A D Monitor Diagnostic failed 12 1059 Object Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Good read for the Proximity Sensor 2213 0101 1077 Bypass Circuitr Object Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Proximity Sensor DAC step test failed too many readings out of range 2219 1000 ven Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Proximity Sensor DAC step test is 2213 1000 0602 Object Controller Mixed Board B3b Invalid Analog Input Threshold 2223 0227 2222 2222 parameters Min Threshold W4d Max Threshold W6d B3 Men Unknown Object Controller SCC t Code WOx W2x W4x W6x Unknown Object Controller ING OUT6 t Code WOx W2x W4x W6x Object Controller ING OUT6 Board B6b Echo Error t Expected Echo 9999 9999 99 W2x Actual Echo W4x 2501 222 222 2202 oe IN6 OUT6 Board B2b Output B3d Output Failure 2 1 IN6 OUT6 Board B2b Output B3d Output Noisy During oe Coal Board 5826 Monitor B3d Output Voltage IN6 OUT6 Board B2b Output 5838 Output Noisy During conten INe OUTE Board B2b Monitor B3d Output Voltage SER Board B2b Monitor B3d Output Voltage Object Controller IN6 OUT6 Board B2b Monitor B3d Output Voltage Reference OFF Test Noisy 04 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 16 3 Error Codes 4 AnsaldoSTS ERROR MESSAGE ACTUAL ERROR CODE Object Controller ING OUT6 Board Information Data
91. No V24ZA50 ASTS USA J735550 0016 ordered separately 3 28 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 5 ww E 7 AnsaldoSTS OC Configurations OBJECT CONTROLLER 6 IN 6 OUT I O CONNECTOR WIRING STANDARD ISOLATED INPUTS J1 ORANGE 120 5 12 Use primary lightning arresters when operating equipment external of the case N451552 0101 Low Voltage Arrester A A N451552 0201 High Voltage Arrester SIANDARD ISOLATED OUTPUTS G outputs A 7 EA _OUTPUT 2 Use primary lightning arresters when operating equipment external of the NO 22 S AN N451552 0101 Low Voltage Arrester OUTPUT 3 A N4515520201 High Voltage Arrester OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 6 Part numbers 17700111 N17700112 do not use 72 Figure 3 19 Standard Inputs and Outputs for Part Numbers N17700105 N17700106 N17700111 and N17700112 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 3 29 OC Configurations 7 AnsaldoSTS OBJECT CONTROLLER 3 BIPOLAR INPUTSAND 1 BIPOLAR OUTPUT WITH 4 STANDARD OUTPUTS J1 BI POLAR INPUTS ORANGE 1 2 ON Use primary lightning arresters when operating equipment external of the case AN N451552 0101 Low Voltage Arrester A 451552 0201 High Voltage Arrester Q N BI POLAR J2 OUTPUT GRAY Use primary lightning arresters when operating
92. OC program only contains a BOOLEAN Section with ASSIGN statements the program will execute in the same manner as MICROLOK II 11 12 Boolean Logic vs Relay Logic The examples shown in Figure 11 10 Figure 11 11 and Figure 11 12 compare Boolean logic code to relay equivalent circuits 11 12 1 ASSIGN Statement One Refer to Figure 11 10 ASSIGN R62AS 59TPS 5955 5955 B R62AS 59TPS 5955 N boy at 59SS Figure 11 10 ASSIGN Statement One 11 12 2 ASSIGN Statement Two Refer to Figure 11 11 ASSIGN 59 L60HS 59NWC L60AHS 59RWC 59 R62VS TO R62VS 11 14 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Application Programming 59 2 L60HS 59NWC R62VS Lo 1 2 21 Figure 11 11 ASSIGN Statement Two 11 12 3 ASSIGN Statement Three Refer to Figure 11 12 ASSIGN R62RCS R62RGP 60TPS ACPOS 59TPS A51TPS 59NWC 51TPS 59RWC 62 R62AS TO R62AS NV_R62AS A A A Y Y Loy Figure 11 12 ASSIGN Statement Three SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 11 15 A Application Programming 7 AnsaldoSTS 11 13 Programming Limitations and Rules CAUTION OC applications must consider all the guidelines of SM 6800G Boolean expressions are used in ASSIGN NV ASSIGN and IF statements
93. PORT 1 72 ADJUSTABLE BAUD 38400 73 ADJUSTABLE STOPBITS 1 74 ADJUSTABLE PARITY NONE 75 ADJUSTABLE KEY ON DELAY 0 76 ADJUSTABLE KEY OFF DELAY 0 77 ADJUSTABLE GRANT DELAY 10 MSEC 78 ADJUSTABLE POINT POINT 1 79 80 VITAL STATION 81 ADJUSTABLE MII ADDRESS 270 82 83 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 84 STATION NAME STATION_ 270 85 ADJUSTABLE PEER ADDRESS 160 86 ADJUSTABLE TIME STAMP 1 87 88 ADJUSTABLE ACK TIMEOUT 1000 MSEC 89 ADJUSTABLE HEARTBEAT INTERVAL 2000 MSEC SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 14 35 Sample Listing File 77 AnsaldoSTS 90 ADJUSTABLE INDICATION UPDATE CYCLE 2 91 ADJUSTABLE STALE DATA TIMEOUT 30000 MSEC 92 ADJUSTABLE CLOCK MASTER 1 93 ADJUSTABLE UTC TIME STAMP 1 94 95 OUTPUT 96 270 160 1 Application GPS PEER TEST compiled on Thu Apr 09 15 27 52 2009 CRC 67e2 Checksum c4d9 Page 97 98 INPUT 99 270 160 11 100 101 VITAL STATION 102 ADJUSTABLE MII ADDRESS 10 103 104 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 105 STATION NAME STATION_10 106 ADJUSTABLE PEER ADDRESS 20 107 ADJUSTABLE TIME STAMP 1 108 109 ADJUSTABLE ACK TIMEOUT 1000 MSEC 110 ADJUSTABLE HEARTBEAT INTERVAL 2000 MSEC 111 ADJUSTABLE INDICATION UPDATE CYCLE 2 14 36 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 77 AnsaldoSTS Sample Listing File 112 ADJUSTABLE STALE DATA TIMEOUT 30000 MSEC 113 ADJUSTABLE CLOCK MASTER 1 114 ADJUSTABLE UTC TIME STAMP 0 115 116 OUTPUT
94. Proximity Sensor failed Sensor 2 s 2213 2206 A D Sensor Monitor Diagnostics Object Controller Mixed Board B2b Proximity Sensor failed Sensor 2213 2207 Bypass A D Sensor Monitor Diagnostics Object Controller Mixed I O Board B3b Proximity Sensor Bypass Power 99 Monitor Diagnostics passed 2213 0000 Object Controller Mixed Board B3b Proximity Sensor Sensor 1 Power 22 Monitor Diagnostics passed 2213 0907 0001 2002 Object Controller Mixed I O Board B3b Proximity Sensor Sensor 2 Power 22 Monitor Diagnostics passed 2213 i 0002 2002 2001 2001 2002 Object Controller Mixed I O Board B3b Proximity Sensor 12V Monitor 22 Diagnostics passed 2213 00 0003 2002 Object Controller Mixed I O Board B3b Proximity Sensor 10V Monitor 22 Diagnostics passed 2213 00 0004 2002 16 2 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 lt N 77 AnsaldoSTS Error Codes ERROR MESSAGE ACTUAL ERROR CODE Object Controller Mixed I O Board B3b Proximity Sensor Sensor 1 s A D 22 Sensor Monitor Diagnostics passed 2213 007 0983 2002 Object Controller Mixed Board B3b Proximity Sensor Sensor 2 s A D 22 Sensor Monitor Diagnostics passed 2218 d pens 2003 Object Controller Mixed I O Board B3b Proximity Sensor Sensor Bypass 22 A D Sensor Monitor Diagnostics passed 2219 00 0007 2002 Object Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Proximity Sensor Bypass Power 2213 0101 1044 Monitor Diagnostic passed Object Controller
95. Red Flashes to indicate that data are being transmitted COM 2 RX Flashes to indicate that good data are being received Flashes to indicate that a good address and good data have User defined in the application software 2 ERROR Red Indicates that there is an error with the received data LEDs The LED is ON when the wiring is good LEDs minute when it resets Indicates that Vital Inputs No 1 through No 6 are energized Green Power connection is at the upper board orange connector J1 on the rear of the unit Indicates that Vital Outputs No 1 through No 6 are energized Yellow Power connection is at the upper board gray connector J2 on the rear of the unit Indicates that Vital Inputs No 7 through No 12 are energized Green Power connection is at the lower board orange connector J3 on the rear of the unit Indicates that Vital Outputs No 7 through No 12 are energized Yellow Power connection is at the lower board gray connector J4 on the rear of the unit CPS Indicates that the Conditional Power Supply is operational supplying power to the vital outputs US amp S Logo power indicator and is when power is applied to SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 3 11 77 AnsaldoSTS Ay OC Configurations YOLOANNOO 39NVHO HOLO3NNOO pes MOVE MH
96. Select the time of day either from the PC clock or from the time entered manually by the user Click on the Set Time link to transmit the time to the OC The date and time format is MM DD YY HH MM SS AM PM where M is month D is day Y 15 year H is hour M is minute and S is second An example is 01 01 00 2 05 00 PM which represents January Ist 2000 at 2 05 PM in the afternoon Since the OC s internal clock provides the date stamping information for all logging functions it is important that its accuracy be checked routinely Pa 10 14 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 AnsaldoSTS Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool Ensure that the clock is set correctly after e All Resets e After software upload or download e After time changes daylight savings time e After CPS failures e Once a month as maintenance 3 NETWORK DIAGNOSTIC TOOL VERSION 1 1 N800306 0001 Microsoft Internet Explorer SET CLOCK CPS Down Home RUN TIME MONITOR Current MICROLOK system time Board Information 1 24 2007 9 54 AM Link Information Set from this computer s time Free Run Variable Display 1 24 07 9 54 AM Serial Message Monitor HISTORICAL DATA Set a specific time User Data Log Event Log Error Log Set time Event Error Code Look Up SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SET UP Set Clock Reset Unit Configuration Set Time 1 24 2007 9 54 AM ai Figure 10 15 Set Time of Day Clock Display 10 6 2 Reset MicROLOK Object Con
97. THRESHOLD 12 2 0 0 30 0 35 ADJUSTABLE MAXIMUM THRESHOLD 16 7 0 0 30 0 36 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 14 1 Sample Listing File 7 AnsaldoSTS 37 PROXIMITY SENSOR 1 38 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 39 40 PROXIMITY SENSOR 2 41 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 42 43 44 45 COMM 46 47 LINK PEER1 48 49 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 50 PROTOCOL MII PEER 51 ADJUSTABLE PORT 1 52 ADJUSTABLE BAUD 38400 53 ADJUSTABLE STOPBITS 1 54 ADJUSTABLE PARITY NONE 55 ADJUSTABLE KEY ON DELAY 0 56 ADJUSTABLE KEY OFF DELAY 0 57 ADJUSTABLE GRANT DELAY 10 MSEC 58 ADJUSTABLE POINT POINT 1 59 ADJUSTABLE MII DEBUG PORT ADDRESS 0 60 61 VITAL STATION 62 ADJUSTABLE MII ADDRESS 10 63 64 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 65 STATION NAME STATION_1 66 ADJUSTABLE PEER ADDRESS 20 67 ADJUSTABLE TIME STAMP 1 68 69 ADJUSTABLE ACK TIMEOUT 500 MSEC 70 ADJUSTABLE HEARTBEAT INTERVAL 1000 MSEC 71 ADJUSTABLE INDICATION UPDATE CYCLE 5 72 ADJUSTABLE STALE DATA TIMEOUT 3000 MSEC 73 ADJUSTABLE CLOCK MASTER 1 74 75 OUTPUT 76 MII 10 20 BO1 MII 10 20 BO2 MII 10 20 BO3 MII 10 20 BO4 77 78 INPUT 79 MII 10 20 Bl1 MII 10 20 BI2 MII 10 20 BI3 10 20 814 80 81 82 LINK PEER2 83 84 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 14 2 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Sample Listing File 85 PROTOCOL MII PEER 86 ADJUSTABLE PORT 2 87 ADJUSTABLE BAUD 38400 88 ADJUSTABLE STOPBITS
98. TO Figure 11 3 Example of Front and Back Contact Assignments 11 7 Queuing Options The Executive Software takes equations out of the queue one at a time starting with the first equation and continuing until the queue is empty Figure 11 4 If any executed equation causes a change in the value of any bit more equations may need to be executed If so the new equations are placed breaks Figure 11 4 Queuing Option Example before makes at the end of the queue after any equations that are already queued The Executive Software continues to execute equations one at a time until the queue is empty At this time any changed outputs will be delivered to the output processors SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 11 5 Application Programming 7 AnsaldoSTS When R2 drops both the RA and RC equations are placed on the queue to be executed RA which involves the break is queued and executed first When the RA equation is executed RA drops This causes the RB equation to be queued Since there is only one queue the RB equation Is placed in the queue after the RC equation The RC equation is then removed and executed RB 18 still picked and R2 is dropped causing RC to pick Since RC has now changed state and 15 used in the RC equation this equation goes back on the queue after the RB equation The RB equation is removed from the queue and executed This causes to drop The RC equation is removed and re executed RB
99. These statements may consist of any of the operators and any numeric or Boolean variables constants or numeric arrays The compiler generates these expressions in the application image assuming two stacks and evaluation using reverse polish notation One of the stacks is used for numeric operands and intermediate numeric results The other stack is used for Boolean variables and intermediate results If an expression results in a sequence of operations generated by the compiler that requires either the numeric or the Boolean stack to hold more than 20 elements the compiler will produce an error Also an expression may not contain more than 60 operators of any kind or more than 20 numeric operators including array accesses 11 13 1 Program limitations Rules and limitations that can cause problems if not considered that is a program that won t compile or a program that crashes the OC in operation e 4000 bit names in a program 128 IN and OUT designations in a special list Vital 512IN and OUT designations in a special list Non Vital e 32 Addresses per port declaration e 4095 ASSIGN statements e 499 equations on the queue list at a time 50 triggers maximum per bit 11 13 2 Serial Port Limitations The SCC Board provides 2 Ethernet or 1 Ethernet and 1 RS 232 ports The Ethernet port s support the PEER protocol The RS 232 port supports the MICROLOK GENISYS and PEER protocols 11 14 Network Diagnostic Tool
100. activate use this control E Figure 10 19 Typical Main Screen with Unit in Shutdown Mode SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 10 19 Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool Z AnsaldoSTS 10 6 3 System Configuration This function allows the user to change configurable parameters A password is required to modify parameters NOTE When configuring OC part number N17700119 make sure the write enable adapter is connected between the dongle and the front panel serial port The dialog box shown in Figure 10 20 appears after the user clicks the System Configuration link on the main menu on the left side of the screen This dialog presents the user with a password entry text box The System Configuration allows the user to view and make changes to the vital and non vital settings of boards and links The program does not allow access to modifications of configuration values without the correct password 3 NETWORK DIAGNOSTIC TOOL VERSION 1 1 N800306 0001 Microsoft Internet Explorer loj x SYSTEM CONFIGURATION CPS Down RUN TIME MONITOR Modifying Vital and Non Vital Settings HISTORICAL DATA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SET UP System Configuration 1 24 2007 10 15 AM 2i Figure 10 20 System Configuration Dialog Box 10 20 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool 10 6 3 1 Configuring the MICROLOK Object Controller System 10 6 3 1 1 Procedure
101. any given relay in the order which they occur In Figure 11 2 if relay changes state is executed break followed by EQ2 make Next the change in EQ relay R2 causes EQ3 to be executed break thus the make of EQ2 occurs before the break of EQ3 A maximum of 4000 equations may be queued at any one time Figure 11 2 Queuing Options Reference Diagram 11 6 Comparison of Hardware and Software Relay Logic There are limits to which the OC system can emulate actions and reactions of a relay system Relay systems which are based on electrical hardware connections processes multiple logic functions in parallel The OC which is based on a microprocessor and software processes multiple logic functions sequentially For example where a single contact in a relay system is used in processing two different logic functions both logic functions start processing simultaneously when the relay changes state 11 4 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 A 7 AnsaldoSTS Application Programming In Figure 11 3 the RA equation is the front contact and the equation 15 the back contact All equations that use the NOT operand are a back contact In a relay system there will be a measurable time when starts to drop when neither the front nor back contacts has energy applied In the OC this transfer is instantaneous Either the front or back contact has energy applied at all times N ASSIGN Ri TO ASSIGN NOTRI
102. as a minimum e Internet Explorer IE Version 6 0 or higher e Java Run Time Environment Version 1 4 2 or higher 4 2 Configuring Internet Explorer To be able to use Internet Explorer to access the configuration functions of the OC you may need to do one or both of the following e Delete the Temporary Internet Files saved by Internet Explorer e Modify network settings to establish communications with the OC 4 2 1 Deleting Saved Temporary Internet Files To ensure the PC is working with the latest version of software it is necessary to delete any files that Internet Explorer may have saved from earlier installations Delete these saved files using the following procedure these temporary files can be deleted without causing any problems 1 Start Internet Explorer 2 Select Tools gt Internet Options See Figure 4 1 The system will display the Internet Options dialog box See Figure 4 2 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 4 1 w Configure the to Communicate with the 7 AnsaldoSTS Union Switch 8 Sign Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edt View Favorites Toole gt Back gt 09 1 iz Mailand News Pop up Blocker Address http www switch Manage Add ons Synchronize Windows Update Windows UNION SWITCH Sun Java Console Internet Options ANSALDO SIGNAL UNION SWITCH amp SIGNAL INC IS LEADER IN THE
103. c4d9 Page 11 Event Threshold 46 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 47 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 48 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 49 1 Non vital Adjustable 14 52 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 77 AnsaldoSTS Event Threshold 50 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 51 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 52 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 53 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 54 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 55 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 56 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 57 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 58 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 59 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 60 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 61 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 62 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 63 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 64 1 Non vital Adjustable Logic Timeout 1500 Vital Adjustable Configuration Compatibility 0 Fixed PC Vital Config Date 0 Vital Adjustable PC NV Config Date 0 Non vital Adjustable Front Vital Config Date 0 Vital Adjustable Front NV Config Date 0 Non vital Adjustable Password 0 Vital Adjustable Debug Port Address 1 Fixed Debug Port Baudrate 9600 Fixed Delay Reset 0 Fixed SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 Sample Listing File 14 53 AV Sample Listing File 77 AnsaldoSTS AnsaldoSTS 14 54 SM 9494 Rev 7 Feb
104. compiler has made SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 12 7 Compiling an OC Application 7 AnsaldoSTS NOTE The compiler checks the application for program integrity only it does not check logic 12 1 14 Debugging Typical Compiler Errors When a program is compiled and an error is generated the mll file is usually available for debugging purposes Search for the word Error to locate the approximate line in the program where the error occurs The error must be corrected in the original ml2 file and saved before the next recompile Common errors are explained in the following sub sections 12 1 14 1 Range Error 1134 BOOLEAN BITS ERROR Links must have a unique port number This indicates that a port was not assigned a correct value 12 1 14 2 Syntax Error First Example 458 BYTE 1 459 71 LIA4HGP ERROR Syntax error on line 459 at before Z1_L14HGP The compiler found no semicolon to end the group 12 1 14 3 Syntax Error Second Example 2727 R48HS 1455 A7NWC 1NTBR 5221 R44HZSB 5221 1655 ERROR Syntax error on line 2727 at or before 1NTBR R48HS 1455 47NWC 1NTBR The required operand is missing 12 8 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Compiling an OC Application 12 1 14 4 Undefined Error 4633 assign bl to B2 ERROR 1 is not defined 432 ERROR B2 is not defined 4634 ERROR bl is not defined in any bit list
105. does not come on as expected turn the unit off and verify that all of the cables and power cord are securely connected Turn the power on and verify the LED is working If it does not energize replace the unit and return it to the factory 4 4 Connecting the PC to the Object Controller A PC can be directly connected to the Object Controller with a crossover Ethernet cable or by using an Ethernet hub or switch using a straight Ethernet cable 4 6 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 AnsaldoSTS Configure the to Communicate with the CAUTION Connect to only one Ethernet port on the Object Controller at a time until all of the ports have been configured The PC will go into the limited connectivity mode if a cross over Ethernet cable is connected from the PC directly into the Ethernet port on the Object Controller This can be observed by positioning the cursor over the network icon two PC monitors found in the lower right hand corner of the task bar of the PC See Figure 4 8 When it is in this limited connectivity mode the PC will have an IP address in the 169 254 range where can be any value from 0 to 255 Local Area Connection 2 Speed 100 0 Mbps Status Limited or no connectivity Ube 2 24 PM Figure 4 8 Connectivity Mode Indication SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 Configure the PC to Communicate with the 7 AnsaldoSTS y Ansaldo
106. external of the case NPUT 3 5 N451552 0101 Low Voltage E Arrester 6 NPUT 4 N 451552 0201 High Voltage 7 Arrester 8 PROX 1 BRN 9 MOV V24ZA50 BLU 010 J735550 0016 PROX SEN 2 BRN 5 PROXIMITY SENSOR BLU 0 to 30VDC _ STANDARD ISOLATED J2 OUTPUTS rl OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 Use primary lightning arresters when operating equipment external of the NO Case CONNECT lt N451552 0101 Low Voltage Arrester QUTPUT 3 ZA 451552 0201 High Voltage Arrester OUTPUT 4 O10 O11 O12 Figure 3 15 Standard Inputs and Outputs for Part Numbers N17700101 and N17700102 Proximity sensor is ordered separately Surge protection is required across each sensor input No V24ZA50 ASTS USA J735550 0016 ordered separately SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 3 25 22 OC Configurations 7 AnsaldoSTS OBJECT CONTROLLER 2 BIPOLAR INPUTS 2 BIPOLAR OUTPUTS 2 PROXIMITY SENSORS 1 ANALOG INPUT A BI POLAR INPUTS l10N 20N lt N 1 2 ON Use primary lightning arresters when operating equipment external of the case N451552 0101 Low Voltage Arrester ZX N451552 0201 High Voltage Arrester 3 4 ON PROX SEN 1 MOV 24ZA50 J735550 0016 PROX SEN 2 BRN PROXIMITY SENSOR ANALOG
107. gt STANDBY This Boolean bit has no function A read only Boolean bit that indicates whether or not a slave is lt link_name gt lt slave_name gt ENABLED enabled nn is the slave address 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED A read write Boolean bit that allows the application program to link name slave name DISABLE disable a specific CLASSC EMP station A read only Boolean bit that indicates the current status of slave link name slave name STATUS communication nn is the slave address 0 FAILED 1 NORMAL link name slave name INPUTS RECEIVED This Boolean bit has no function 9 1 2 5 Network Diagnostic Tool Support for the CLASSC EMP Protocol Link This section describes the part of the Network Diagnostic Tool that is applicable to the CLASSC EMP Protocol 9 1 2 5 1 CLASSC EMP Protocol Link Configuration In the main menu click on the link labeled System Configuration Select the appropriate link button to modify or view the configuration elements Figure 9 8 presents the configuration of the CLASSC EMP Protocol Link CLASSC EMP Protocol link configuration parameters are described in Section 9 1 2 3 of this manual SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 9 11 GPS MASTER Specifications AnsaldoSTS m System Configuration CLASS C EMP CLASS C EMP Link Enable Point to Point Physical port number Baud rate Stop bits Parity Key On delay Key Of
108. messaes received 0 Received ACKnowledge count 0 Bad received message count 0 response error count 0 d errors in a complete message 0 Receiver overrun error count 0 Hardware error at interrupt level 0 Receive buffer overflow error count 0 FIFO overflow error count 0 Message length error count 0 Received ESCAPE error count 0 Unsupported message count 0 Unsupported message subheader count 0 Invalid message format count 0 Receiver timeout count 0 Maximum bytes removed from FIFO 0 4 30 2008 2 50 PM Figure 9 10 Link Information CLASSC EMP 9 14 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 77 AnsaldoSTS C 4 AnsaldoSTS GPS MASTER Specifications 9 1 2 5 4 CLASSC EMP Protocol Serial Message Monitor In the main menu click on the link labeled Serial Message Monitor Select the appropriate link to monitor from the list on the left to monitor Figure 9 11 presents a typical display for the CLASSC EMP Protocol Monitor The protocol monitor display for the CLASSC EMP Protocol Link shows message time message direction transmitted or received and message type followed by the full text of the transmitted or received message in hexadecimal bytes Please refer to an appropriate CLASSC EMP Protocol document for additional information on the CLASSC EMP Protocol NETWORK DIAGNOSTIC TOOL VERSION 1 3B Prototype N800306 0001 Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by ProvidedBY Union Switch SER
109. right click on the IP Address selected to open the network diagnostic tool See Figure 6 6 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 6 5 Acquiring the IP address of Ethernet Port 77 AnsaldoSTS Digi Device Discovery Device Tasks Open web interface Configure networ amp settings Restart device Other Tasks Refresh view Help and Support Details Microlok II Network Adapter Configured Static address 169 254 1 10 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway 0 0 0 0 Serial ports 0 Firmware Microlok Networ Figure 6 6 IP Address 2169 254 1 10 18 x MAC Address 00 40 90 2 Open web interface stwork Adapter Telnet to command line Configure network settings Restart device Open Web Interface from Digi Device Discovery Tool 6 6 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 C 7 AnsaldoSTS Uploading a MICROLOK OC Executive or Application 7 UPLOADING A MICROLOK OC EXECUTIVE OR APPLICATION This section describes the process of uploading software to the OC PC to OC NOTE The RAMO directory is used for uploading OC Executive and Application software Once the software is uploaded to the OC the directory is empty The directory contains files running the Digi server that are accessed by the OC s CPU during normal operation 1 From the Advanced Tools page See Figure 7 1 click on Upload gt Ad
110. states In order to support the detection of a coded state three Application Program board types have been implemented CODED MIXIO CODED IN6 OUT6 and CODED IN6 These boards will support a FLASH input state in addition to the existing OFF and ON states The exact code rate will not be detected Detected code rates less than 45 cycles per minute but greater than 30 cycles per minute and code rates greater than 75 cycles per minute will cause the input to be declared FAIL ed for the time period that the invalid code rate is detected When the input is declared FAIL ed a Warning will be logged in the Object Controller s System Event Log If a Warning has been logged and the input has been detected as a valid code rate or a steady OFF or ON state then an event will be logged declaring the input to be in a good state For each input bit defined for CODED MIXIO CODED IN6 OUT6 or CODED IN6 board Flash bit will be created and made available to the Application Program When the CODED MIXIO CODED IN6 OUT6 or CODED IN6 board detects a valid code rate both the Input bit and the associated Flash bit will be set When the CODED MIXIO CODED IN6 OUT6 or CODED IN6 board detects a steady OFF state both bits will be clear When the CODED MIXIO CODED IN6 0UT6 or CODED IN6 board detects a steady ON state then only the Input bit will be set For an Input bit to be detected as a steady ON input the signal must be present for at
111. this location in the program statement 11 3 Main Program Body The actual system logic is written in the main program body Every internal or output relay bit name defined in the INTERFACE and VAR sections should be given a value in the main program body except Spare keyword bits This is done by making the bit the object of an ASSIGN statement If an output bit is not the object of an ASSIGN statement the program may operate properly but that bit will be ignored Serial input bits from Master or Slave may be the object of an ASSIGN statement 11 4 Breaks Before Makes Rule The Executive Software recognizes that the order in which equations are executed affects the internal and output states of the system To emulate relay circuits operation as closely as possible the Executive Software employs the traditional break before make rule of relay systems It determines which equations involve the front contact and which equations involve the back contacts of a relay in a typical application Depending on whether the relay picks or drops one set of contacts is defined as the breaks and one set is defined as the makes Those equations that are the breaks are executed before those that are the makes When a change of state is observed by an input internal or output bit all logic equations that involve a contact of that bit are queued for execution breaks before makes The OC executive places all equations to be executed in a qu
112. to the truth table shown in Figure 11 8 Figure 11 8 ASSIGN Operators Truth Table The order of evaluation is determined by the following precedence rules 11 8 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 A 7 AnsaldoSTS Application Programming HIGHEST NOT AND LOWEST OR XOR Operations with the highest precedence are performed first Figure 11 9 Operations at the same precedence level are evaluated left to right Parentheses may be added to alter this default order Parentheses take precedence over the defined operational order If more than one relay is to be assigned the same value the logic expression need not be repeated in a second ASSIGN statement Additional relay names may be assigned using the same statement by listing them after the Reserved Word separated by commas For example ASSIGN A AND B NOT C TO ASSIGN AND NOTIN AORIN B TOOUT 5 ms eei 5 urs Figure 11 9 ASSIGN Operators and Order of Precedence Samples 11 9 Compiler Defined System Bits and Numerics Several bits are predefined by the compiler to indicate executive status information to the application and to allow the application to control some executive functions These bits are shown in Table 11 2 Similarly there are several numerics predefined by the compiler to allow access to the time of day These bits a
113. 0 to 30VDC BIPOLAR OUTPUTS GRAY 1 3 2 ON 4 Use primary lightning arresters when operating equipment external of the case N451552 0101 Low Voltage Arrester ZA N451552 0201 High Voltage Arrester Figure 3 16 Bipolar Inputs and Outputs for Part Numbers N17700101 and N17700102 with proximity sensor ordered separately Surge protection is required across each sensor input MOV No V24ZA50 ASTS USA J735550 0016 ordered separately 3 26 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS OC Configurations OBJECT CONTROLLER 8 INPUTS 8 OUTPUTS 4 PROXIMITY SENSORS 2 ANALOG INPUTS STANDARD J1 STANDARD J3 ISOLATED INPUTS ORANGE ISOLATED INPUTS ORANGE B12 o INPUT 1 1 INPUT 5 1 N12 o 2 2 Use primary lightning arresters 3 INPUT 6 3 when operating equipment 4 4 external of the INPUT 43 5 INPUT 47 n 5 N451552 0101 Low Voltage Arrester 6 T 6 INPUT 4 INPUT 8 7 N N451552 0201 High Voltage 7 Arrester 8 PROX SEN 1 x PROX SEN 3 BRN 9 BLU PROX SEN 4_ BRN BLU NO CONNECT O ANALOG INPUT 2 MOV 24ZA50 J735550 0016 PROX SEN 2 PROXIMITY SENSOR 0to30VDC STANDARDISOLATED J2 STANDARDISOLATED J4 OUTPUTS GRAY OUTPUTS 1 OUTPUT45 OUTPUT 46 Use primary lightning arresters when operating equipment external of the case N N451552 0101
114. 0000 ADJUSTABLE LINK TIMEOUT 60000 MSEC 300000 5000 60000 7 60000 ADJUSTABLE MASTER TIMEOUT 2000 MSEC 30 10000 Wi 1100 ADJUSTABLE UTC CLOCK RECOVERY WINDOW 9 30 seconds dflt 3 seconds ADJUSTABLE INTERBYTE TIMEOUT 0 MSEC 0 100 DfltO ADJUSTABLE DYNAMICS CODE 4 13 12 l1 4 Dflt4 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 77 AnsaldoSTS ADJUSTABLE MINIMUM SIGNAL 2 0 ADJUSTABLE MAXIMUM PDOP 8 0 ADJUSTABLE POINT POINT CONFIGURATION SYSTEM FIXED DEBUG_PORT_ADDRESS 1 1 FIXED DEBUG_PORT_BAUDRATE ADJUSTABLE LOGIC_TIMEOUT EVENT THRESHOLD 39 2 LOGIC BEGIN ASSIGN 1 ASSIGN VIO O ASSIGN VIO 1 ASSIGN 10 2 ASSIGN 10 3 ASSIGN 10 4 ASSIGN 10 5 NV ASSIGN 10 5 ASSIGN VI1 0 ASSIGN VI1 1 ASSIGN VI1 2 ASSIGN VI1 3 ASSIGN VI1 4 ASSIGN VI1 5 NV ASSIGN VI1 5 END LOGIC END PROGRAM SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 TO TO TO TO TO TO TO TO TO TO TO TO TO TO TO Sample Applications 2 010 10 0 Inc 1 0 Dflt 2 0 FLOAT 4 0 to 30 0 Inc 1 0 Dflt 8 0 FLOAT 0 1 Dft1 9600 500 CPS ENABLE BIT 100 BIT 101 BIT 102 103 104 BIT 154 LED 1 BIT 200 BIT 201 BIT 202 BIT 203 BIT 204 BIT 254 LED 2 13 13 Sample Applications 7 AnsaldoSTS 13 4 GPS MASTER MII PEER Ex
115. 1 9 5 GPS MASTER Specifications NETWORK DIAGNOSTIC TOOL VERSION 1 40 N800306 0001 Microsoft Internet Explorer Home RUN TIME MONITOR Board Information Link Information Free Run Variable Display Serial Message Monitor HISTORICAL DATA User Data Log Event Log Error Log Event Error Code Look Up SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SET UP Set Clock Reset Unit Configuration LINK INFORMATION 77 AnsaldoSTS Link Information Link Name GPS_MASTER Link Type GPS MASTER otal messages sent 111709 Soft reset requests sent 1 Factory reset requests sent 0 Receiver health requests sent 10156 Get supplemental time requests sent 1 Get message broadcast options requests sent 1 Set message broadcast options requests sent 0 Configure self survey requests sent 0 Get self survey configuration requests sent 1 Get time requests sent 101543 Get primary receiver configuration messages sent 1 Set primary receiver configuration messages sent 0 Get secondary receiver configuration messages sent 1 Set secondary receiver configuration messages sent 0 Get NMEA Interval and Message Mask messages sent 1 Set NMEA Interval and Message Mask messages sent 0 Get option flags messages sent 1 Set fO option flags messages sent 0 Get PPS characteristics messages sent 1 Set PPS characteristics messages 0 ast Get PPS Width messages sent 1 4 9 2009 5 58 Figure 9 4 Network Diagnostic Tool
116. 13 I O PCB Functional Specifications ANALOG INPUT SPECIFICATIONS Input Voltage Range 0 to 30VDC 50VDC without damage to input Maximum Input Voltage Input will only measure up to 30VDC Input Impendence 10K Ohms Input Voltage Isolation 2000VAC between input leads and Battery 0 2VDC from 0 to 10VDC Accuracy 2 0 from 10 to 30VDC Intended for DC measurement only Response Time Readings updated approximately once per second PROXIMITY SENSOR SPECIFICATIONS Must use a ASTS USA Proximity Sensor with surge protection MOV at the junction box Surge Protection terminals located approximately six feet from sensor Use MOV V24ZA50 ASTS USA number J735550 0016 Refer to Section 15 2 4 2 lt board name gt Proximity Sensor x states whether the Proximity Sensor is Set Touching or Clear Not Touching e If the lt board name gt Proximity Sensor x Indeterminate is set this states that the Proximity Sensor is in an invalid state and the lt board name gt Proximity Sensor x bit will be clear 3 40 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS OC Configurations Table 3 14 Inductive Proximity Sensors with Extended Temperature Range 40C to 700 CURRENT DISPLACEMENT PART CONNECTION BELATIONSHIE VOLTAGE DETECTION NUMBER TYPE H DISTANCE EN RE MM IN 0 20mm 2mm 0 0 787391 0 35 1 20 0 0787391 Quick Pus 61 5 J7381040029 VDO d g
117. 2 1 Physical Connections Connection to the radio is made via an RJ 45 Ethernet connecter See MDS entraNET 220 data radio application documentation for connection information 9 8 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 A E AnsaldoSTS GPS MASTER Specifications 9 1 2 2 CLASSC EMP Protocol Link Definition The CLASSC EMP protocol communication driver is defined in the Object Controller application program in a manner similar to that used to define other Object Controller communication protocol drivers The CLASSC EMP link configuration parameters are listed and described in Table 9 2 See application program example in Section 13 3 Table 9 2 55 Protocol Link Compiler Commands and Their Functions COMMAND FUNCTION LINK Declares an CLASSC protocol serial link and defines the link name The link name is a user selectable text string No default Not adjustable Specifies whether or not the CLASS protocol link will be enabled on unit ENABLE initialization 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED No default CLASSC EMP declares that this link will support the CLASSC No default PROTOCOL Not adjustable PORT The physical port to which the CLASSC EMP link will be attached The CLASSC EMP can be assigned to Port 1 or 2 There is no default The data rate at which the link will operate Available selections are 150 300 BAUD 600 1200 1800 2400 3600 4800 7200 9600 and 19200 bits per second The default rate is 9600 NO RESPONSE T
118. 2 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 gt 7 AnsaldoSTS Sample Listing File 163 CLOCK SECOND 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 164 APP CRC 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 165 APP VERSION 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 166 EXEC CRC 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 167 SYSTEM LOAD 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 168 CONFIG CRC 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 169 NUMERIC SPARE 1 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 170 NUMERIC SPARE 2 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 171 1 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 NON IN 175 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 VITAL INT 176 n2 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 VITAL INT 177 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 VITAL INT 178 n4 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 VITAL INT 179 n5 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 VITAL INT 180 n6 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 VITAL INT 181 7 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 VITAL INT 182 n8 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 VITAL INT 183 n9 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 VITAL INT 184 10 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 VITAL INT 185 11 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 VITAL INT 186 n12 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 VITAL INT 187 21 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 1 ASGN VITAL INT 188 n22 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 VITAL INT Board Summary THESCC SCC THESCC Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable THESCC Selective Shutdown 0 Fixed THEIN6OUT6 IN6 OUT6 THEIN6OUT6 Enabled 1
119. 210 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 151 211 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 152 BIT 212 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 153 213 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 154 BIT 214 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 155 220 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 156 BIT 221 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 157 222 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 158 BIT 223 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 159 224 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 160 BIT 230 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 161 231 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 162 232 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 163 233 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 164 234 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 165 240 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 166 BIT 241 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 167 242 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 168 243 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 169 244 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 170 BIT 250 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 171 251 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 172 BIT 252 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 173 253 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 174 254 0 0 0 0 0 1 ASGN VITAL OUT 175 GPS_MASTER Enabled 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 176 GPS_MASTER Disable 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT Numeric Usage Summary NAME MINIMUM MAXIMUM ERROR INITIAL EVAL TARGET VITAL SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 14 27 Sample Listing File 7 AnsaldoSTS 177 CLOCK MONTH 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 178 CLOCK DAY 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 179 CLOCK YEAR 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 180 CLOCK HOUR 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 181 CLOCK MINUTE 21474
120. 3 18 Figure 3 11 Object Controller N17700116 Front and Rear 3 19 Figure 3 12 Object Controller N17700117 Front and Rear 5 3 21 Figure 3 13 Object Controller N17700118 Front and Rear 3 22 vi SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 4 77 AnsaldoSTS Table of Contents Figure 3 14 Standard Inputs and Outputs for Part Numbers 17700101 and N17700102 3 23 Figure 3 15 Bipolar Inputs and Outputs for Part Numbers 17700101 and 17700102 3 24 Figure 3 16 Standard Inputs and Outputs for Part Number N17700103 3 25 Figure 3 17 Bipolar Inputs and Outputs for Part Number N17700103 3 26 Figure 3 18 Standard Inputs and Outputs for Part Numbers N17700105 N17700106 N17700111 and 17700112 3 27 Figure 3 19 Bipolar Inputs and Outputs for Part Numbers 17700105 17700106 17700111 and 17700112 3 28 Figure 3 20 Standard Inputs and Outputs for Part Numbers 17700107 and 17700108 3 29 Figure 3 21 Bipolar Inputs and Outputs for Part Numbers N17700107 and 17700108 3 30 Figure 3 22 Standard Outputs for Part Numbers N17700115 and 17700116
121. 3 5 OC Configurations 7 AnsaldoSTS LED LED When On steagy indicates that the sensor is detecting metal When flashing indicates that the sensor is in an indeterminate PRX 3 Yellow state PRX4 When Off indicates that the sensor in not detecting metal This connection is at the lower board orange connector J3 on the rear of the unit na Indicates that the Conditional Power Supply is operational supplying power to the vital outputs 0585 Logo Ie power indicator and is ON when power is applied to 3 6 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 5 gt O O O HOLO3NNOO Andino HOLO3NNOO o 5 lt Va TANVd MOVE GO O 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 93H 4 0000000000000 sh 900 HOLO3NNOO H3MOd 1 asna 1HOd OILSONDVIG HOLIMS 440 NO E S1HOd gt XA AEE 1000 06008N aasn T 3YVMLIOS 3AI1nO3X3 M e eunaearve 5831 2 TANNVHO WINOO
122. 31 LNdNI 3 21 Figure 3 12 Object Controller N17700117 Front and Rear Panels SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 77 AnsaldoSTS OC Configurations TANVd MOVE TANVd LNOtid T ol Whe ra ang sr e s HOLO3NNOO sssuqov ovn eo Sis H3MOd LNdNI 100183 iva lt e asna Kraze 437 40 e asna 9 T MOTI3A e 5 IXXXXX 3dO NO OVW 02 SLHOd NOLLVOrlddv x sona SNIASM xod iude m 5 gt El 1000106008 5 3HVM14OS 3 1 m n MOTI3A 2 004294 es o
123. 32 BIT 132 133 BIT 133 134 BIT 134 135 BIT 140 136 BIT 141 137 BIT 142 138 BIT 143 0 CO OO O O O O O O OO O O O O O O O O oO OoOO 0 14 26 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 1 VITAL OUT VITAL OUT ASGN VITAL OUT ASGN VITAL OUT ASGN VITAL OUT VITAL OUT VITAL OUT VITAL OUT VITAL OUT VITAL OUT VITAL OUT VITAL OUT VITAL OUT VITAL OUT VITAL OUT VITAL OUT VITAL OUT VITAL OUT VITAL OUT VITAL OUT VITAL OUT VITAL OUT VITAL OUT VITAL OUT l 0 A 77 AnsaldoSTS SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Sample Listing File 139 144 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 140 BIT 150 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 141 BIT 151 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 142 152 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 143 BIT 153 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL OUT 144 154 0 0 0 0 1 VITAL OUT 145 200 0 0 0 0 1 VITAL OUT Application EXAMPLE compiled Thu 22 14 42 26 2008 CRC 3e02 Checksum 60ac 11 146 201 0 0 0 0 0 1 ASGN VITAL OUT 147 202 0 0 0 0 0 1 ASGN VITAL OUT 148 203 00 0 0 0 1 ASGN VITAL OUT 149 204 0 0 0 0 0 1 ASGN VITAL OUT 150 BIT
124. 36 Event Threshold 37 Event Threshold 38 Event Threshold 39 Event Threshold 40 Event Threshold 41 Event Threshold 42 Event Threshold 43 Event Threshold 44 Event Threshold 45 Event Threshold 46 Event Threshold 47 Event Threshold 48 Event Threshold 49 Event Threshold 50 Event Threshold 51 Event Threshold 52 Event Threshold 53 Event Threshold 54 Event Threshold 55 Event Threshold 56 Event Threshold 57 Event Threshold 58 Event Threshold 59 Event Threshold 60 Event Threshold 61 Event Threshold 62 Event Threshold 63 Event Threshold 64 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 REI Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Application EXAMPLE compiled on Thu May 22 14 42 26 2008 CRC 3e02 60ac Page 15 Non vital Adjustable Non vital Ad
125. 6 4 16 Dft6 ADJUSTABLE MESSAGE VERSION SIZE 4 4 8 Dflt4 ADJUSTABLE MESSAGE DATA SIZE 64 64 184 Dflt 64 ADJUSTABLE MESSAGE DIGEST SIZE 32 32 160 32 ADJUSTABLE ENCRYPTED KEY EB 1F AO 2E B9 D8 83 72 C7 F1 24 FE 62 2D D6 1C CO 89 F8 40 5 36 F4 2D 8 64 hexidecimal bytes Unspecified bytes filled with O s No dflt Must be specified ADJUSTABLE WIU CHANNEL ADDRESS 1 U_INT32 No Address is specified asa 7 decimal number Up to 3 addresses 13 10 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 4 AnsaldoSTS ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 CHANNEL NAME MP 88 0 Sample Applications may be specified within a single link 0 1 Channel string ADJUSTABLE RADIO CONFIG STRING 00 00 FO 01 00 00 00 01 00 05 00 01 03 7A 00 Up to 4 string segments each 7 010 32 hexadecimal bytes inlength 7 Default isthe NULL string ADJUSTABLE BROADCAST INTERVAL 1000 MSEC 500 60000 7 1000 ADJUSTABLE TEST INTERVAL 0 MSEC 0 OUTPUT 10000 3600000 Dflt 60000 M Note that disables the 7 test interval 1 9999 are 7 invalid NOTE Only outputs are supported Any attemptto define inputs generates
126. 6 OUT6 OUTPUT VO0 0 VO0 1 VO0 2 VO0 3 VO0 4 VOO 5 INPUT VIO O VIO 1 VIO 2 VIO 3 VIO 4 VIO 5 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 BOARD 6 6 2 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 TYPE IN6 OUT6 OUTPUT VO1 0 VO1 1 VO1 2 VO1 3 VO1 4 VO1 5 INPUT VI1 1 VI1 2 VI1 3 VI1 4 VI1 5 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 COMM LINK CLASSC EMP Link name string SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 13 9 w Sample Applications 7 AnsaldoSTS ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 Enable the CLASSC EMP link PROTOCOL CLASSC EMP Type 8 Multiple links are allowed ADJUSTABLE PORT 1 1 2 No default ADJUSTABLE BAUD 9600 4800 9600 19200 38400 9600 ADJUSTABLE STOPBITS 1 1072 01 ADJUSTABLE PARITY NONE NONE ODD EVEN MARK SPACE NONE ADJUSTABLE POINT POINT 1 0 1 7 ADJUSTABLE BROADCAST CHANGE 1 0 1 ADJUSTABLE NO RESPONSE TIMEOUT 1000 MSEC 30 10000 1000 y ADJUSTABLE EMP SOURCE ADDRESS WIU xxxxxxxx wayside up com ASCII string 80 char Dflt is shown ADJUSTABLE EMP TYPE 20480 0 65535 ap Dflt 20480 7 ADJUSTABLE LINK FAIL TIMEOUT 60000 MSEC 1000 60000 60000 ADJUSTABLE MESSAGE TYPE 1 1 65535 Dflt 1 ADJUSTABLE MESSAGE VERSION 1 1 255 Dflt1 ADJUSTABLE WIU ADDRESS SIZE 24 16 32 Dflt 24 ADJUSTABLE MESSAGE TYPE SIZE
127. 62 25 DHngsalvg 133418 TIZSSNY 979 TWNDIS HOLIMS H3T1OH1NOO 1 3 80 30 10HOIN 5 9000000900000 5 6 8 4 9 9 z L ta Y 1HOd OILSONOVIG S1HOd NOIJVOl1ddV 5 uasn 5031 TANNVHO 50311 TANNVHO WINOO 3335 Q31H L1V3H T3NVd LNOtdd 1001 83M L WOO dl WOLSND ssaudav TOOL 83M S WOO 0 1 792 691 P S1HOd 13N43H13 TiV o O qO o ofo O ofo O O XXXXX OVW L WOO I vy wasn g uasn wasn wasn WOO xu xL 9 031 9 031 031 8031 z 031 1037 8 SSW L XL H3TIOHLNOO 193 80 3010U9IN f ama 037 90 MOTI3A san Nano SQ31 LNdNI Figure 3 10 Objec
128. 83648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 182 CLOCK SECOND 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 183 APP CRC 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 184 APP VERSION 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 185 EXEC CRC 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 186 SYSTEM LOAD 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN Application EXAMPLE compiled on Thu May 22 14 42 26 2008 CRC 3e02 Checksum 60ac Page 12 187 CONFIG CRC 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 188 NUMERIC SPARE 1 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 189 NUMERIC SPARE 2 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN Board Summary THESCC SCC THESCC Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable THESCC Selective Shutdown 0 Fixed THEIN6OUT6_1 IN6 OUT6 THEIN6OUTS6 1 Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable THEINGOUTS 1 Selective Shutdown 0 Fixed THEINGOUTS 1 Input Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable THEIN6OUT6 2 IN6 OUT6 THEIN6OUTS6 2 Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable THEINGOUTS6 2 Selective Shutdown 0 Fixed THEIN6OUT6_2 Input Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable Link Summary CLASSC EMP EMP CLASSC EMP Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable Point Point 1 Vital Adjustable Port 1 Vital Adjustable BAUD 9600 Non vital Adjustable StopBits 1 Non vital Adjustable 14 28 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 A 7 AnsaldoSTS Sample Listing File Parity O Non vital Adjustable Key On Delay 0 Non vital Adjustable Key Off Delay 0 N
129. ASGN VITAL OUT 108 MII 10 20 Bl1 0 0 0 0 0 VIA IN 109 flash1 1 2 0 0 0 1 VITAL INT Numeric Usage Summary NAME MINIMUM MAXIMUM ERROR INITIAL EVAL TARGET VITAL Application GPS PEER TEST compiled on Thu Apr 09 15 27 52 2009 CRC 67e2 c4d9 Page 8 110 CLOCK MONTH 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 111 CLOCK DAY 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 112 CLOCK YEAR 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 113 CLOCK HOUR 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 114 CLOCK MINUTE 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 115 CLOCK SECOND 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 116 APP CRC 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 117 APP VERSION 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 14 46 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 77 AnsaldoSTS Sample Listing File 118 EXEC CRC 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 119 SYSTEM LOAD 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 120 CONFIG CRC 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 121 NUMERIC SPARE 1 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 122 NUMERIC SPARE 2 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 123 Al 1 2147483648 2147483647 0 0 NON IN Board Summary THESCC SCC THESCC Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable THESCC Selective Shutdown 0 Fixed THEMIXIO MIXIO THEMIXIO Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable THEMIXIO Selective Shutdown 0 Fixed THEMIXIO Input Enabled
130. DESIGN MANUFACTURE AND SERVICE OF SIGNALING AUTOMATION AND Figure 4 1 IE Ver 6 Tools Drop Down Menu 3 Select the General tab Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced L Home page You can change which page to use for your home Address Use Current Use Default Use Blank Temporary Internet files Z Pages you view on the Internet are stored in a gpecial folder for quick viewing later Delete Cookies Delete Files Settings History The History folder contains links to pages you ve visited for quick access to recently viewed pages Days to keep pages in history 20 8 Clear History Figure 4 2 Internet Explorer Internet Options Dialog Box 4 2 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 AnsaldoSTS Configure the PC to Communicate with the OC 4 Click on the Delete Files button in the Temporary Internet files area In response the system will display a confirmation box asking if you want to delete the temporary Internet files Figure 4 3 Delete Files Delete all Files the Internet Files You can also delete all your offline content stored locally Delete all offline content Figure 4 3 Delete Files Confirmation Dialog Box 5 Click OK The PC will then delete the temporary Internet files 6 Click OK to close the Internet Options dialog box 4 2 2 Modify Network Setti
131. DRATE for the Web Tool port be sure to also adjust the BIT_RATE in the Network Interface configuration niacfg ini file for that port 8 1 Factory WebTool niacfg ini file THHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHE This is the niacfg ini configuration file Comments go from to end of line The order of options does not matter as long as the option is in the correct section THHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHE GENERAL IP 169 254 1 10 IP Address of unit NETMASK 255 255 0 0 Network mask GATEWAY 0 0 0 0 Gateway SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 8 1 Network Adapter Configuration niacfg ini 7 AnsaldoSTS MODE 0 0 WebTool 1 PEER Routing BIT_RATE 9600 Bit rate of the Application s Debug Port CLIENT_TIME_OUT 360 When WebTool is inactive for this time in seconds the connection will close 8 2 Factory Application Port niacfg ini file THHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHE This is the niacfg ini configuration file Comments go from to end of line The order of options does not matter as long as the option is in the correct section THHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHE GENERAL IP 169 254 1 10 IP Address of unit NETMASK 255 255 0 0 Network mask GATEWAY 0 0 0 0 Gateway MODE 1 0 WebTool 1 PEER Routing
132. E 0 0 0 0 0 1SYSTEM VITAL OUT 5CPS STATUS 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 6 USER RESTRICTED 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 7 ERROR RESTRICTED 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 8 CONFIGURE ERROR 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 10 CLOCK FREEZE 0 0 0 O 11 CLOCK SET 0 0 12 PEER CLOCK SET 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 14 LOG OK 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM NON IN 16LOG LARGE 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 17LOG FULL 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN SYSTEM VITAL OUT 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 50 160 1 0 0 0 0 0 1SYSTEM NON OUT 51 LED 2 0 0 0 0 0 1SYSTEM NON OUT 52 LED 3 0 0 0 0 0 1SYSTEM NON OUT 53 LED 4 0 0 0 0 0 1SYSTEM NON OUT 60CPS RESET 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 65 THESCC Enabled 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 66 THESCC Selective Shutdown 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 67 THESCC Spare 1 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 68 THESCC Spare 2 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 69 THEIN6OUT6 Enabled 1 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 70 THEIN6OUTE Selective Shutdown 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 71 THEIN6OUT6 Spare 1 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 72 THEIN6OUT6 Spare 2 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 14 9 Sample Listing File VITAL VITAL IN VITAL IN 1 cl ASGN VITAL OUT ASGN VITAL OUT ASGN VITAL OUT ASGN VITAL OUT ASGN VITAL OUT ASGN VITAL OUT VITAL IN VITAL IN VITAL IN VITAL IN VITAL IN VITAL IN SYSTEM VITAL IN SYSTEM VITAL IN SYSTEM VITAL IN
133. EC CLEAR 8 5 7 136 flash24 6 SEC CLEAR 6 5 8 137 flash25b 2 SEC CLEAR 2 SEC 9 138 139 140 141 LOG 142 BITS 143 BO 1 BO 2 BO 3 4 1 2 BI 3 4 144 OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 145 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 146 THEMIXIO PROXIMITY SENSOR 1 THEMIXIO PROXIMITY SENSOR 1 INDETERMINATE 147 THEMIXIO PROXIMITY SENSOR 2 THEMIXIO PROXIMITY SENSOR 2 INDETERMINATE 148 149 NUMERICS 150 Al 1 151 152 153 CONFIGURATION 154 155 SYSTEM 156 157 ADJUSTABLE DEBUG_PORT_ADDRESS 1 158 ADJUSTABLE DEBUG PORT BAUDRATE 9600 159 ADJUSTABLE LOGIC TIMEOUT 1000 MSEC 160 APPLICATION VERSION 1 161 162 LOGIC BEGIN 163 164 ASSIGN 1 TO CPS ENABLE 10 165 166 ASSIGN IN 1 TO OUT 1 11 167 ASSIGN IN 2 TO OUT 2 12 14 4 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Sample Listing File 168 ASSIGN IN 3 TO OUT 3 24 95 169 ASSIGN IN 4 TO OUT 4 14 170 ASSIGN IN 5 TO OUT 5 15 171 ASSIGN IN 6 TO OUT 6 16 172 173 NV ASSIGN THEMIXIO NV ANALOG INPUT VALID TO THEMIXIO NV ANALOG INPUT LED 17 174 175 ASSIGN THEMIXIO ENABLED TO a 18 176 ASSIGN THEMIXIO INPUT ENABLED TO c 19 177 ASSIGN THEMIXIO NV ANALOG INPUT ENABLED TO d 20 178 ASSIGN THEMIXIO PROXIMITY SENSOR 1 ENABLED TO e 21 179 ASSIGN THEMIXIO PROXIMITY SENSOR 2 ENABLED f 22 180 181 ASSIGN BI 1 1 23 182 ASSIGN BI 2 BO 2
134. EOUT 500 MSEC ADJUSTABLE HEARTBEAT INTERVAL 1000 MSEC ADJUSTABLE INDICATION UPDATE CYCLE 5 ADJUSTABLE STALE DATA TIMEOUT 3000 MSEC ADJUSTABLE CLOCK MASTER 1 OUTPUT MII 20 10 BO1 MII 20 10 BO2 20 10 MII 20 10 BO4 INPUT 20 10 11 MII 20 10 BI2 MII 20 10 BI3 20 10 14 BOOLEAN BITS a b c d e f g h i flash1 flash2 flash3 flash4 flash21 flash22 flash23 flash24 flash25 NUMERIC VARIABLES n1 n2 n3 n4 n5 n7 n8 n9 n10 n11 n12 n21 n22 TIMER BITS flashi SET 500 MSEC CLEAR 500 MSEC flash2 SET 1600 MSEC CLEAR 1600 MSEC flash3 SET 2700 MSEC CLEAR 2700 MSEC flash4 SET 3800 MSEC CLEAR 3800 MSEC flash21 1 SEC CLEAR 1 5 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 13 3 29 Sample Applications 7 AnsaldoSTS flash22 SET 5 SEC CLEAR 5 5 flash23 SET 8 SEC CLEAR 8 5 flasha4 SET 6 SEC CLEAR 5 flash25 2 SEC CLEAR 2 SEC LOG BITS BO 1 BO 2 BO 3 4 1 2 BI 3 4 OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 5 IN 6 THEMIXIO PROXIMITY SENSOR 1 THEMIXIO PROXIMITY SENSOR 1 INDETERMINATE THEMIXIO PROXIMITY SENSOR 2 THEMIXIO PROXIMITY SENSOR 2 INDETERMINATE NUMERICS Al 1 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM ADJUSTABLE DEBUG PORT ADDRESS 1 ADJUSTABLE DEBUG PORT BAUDRATE 9600 ADJUSTABLE LOGIC TIMEOUT 1000 MSEC APPLICATION VERSION 15 LOG
135. IAL MESSAGE MONITOR CPS Up ID Symbol Status Stop LASSC_EMP Clear RUN TIME MONITOR CLASSC EMP Nednesday April 30 2008 Time 14 51 26 5 XMT CLASSC EMP 01 50 00 01 09 00 00 1 00 00 1F CO 00 00 00 00 20 00 00 00 00 57 49 9 XMT C EMP 01 50 00 01 09 00 00 15 00 00 1F C1 00 00 00 00 20 00 00 00 00 5 0 XMTC EMP 01 50 00 01 09 00 00 1A 00 00 1F C2 00 00 00 00 20 00 00 00 00 5 XM EMP 01 50 00 01 09 00 00 15 00 00 1F C3 00 00 00 00 20 00 00 00 00 5 1 4 MLOK_MASTER 01 50 00 01 09 00 00 1 00 00 1F C4 00 00 00 00 20 00 00 00 C 2 XMT CLASSC EMP 01 50 00 01 09 00 00 15 00 00 1F C5 00 00 00 00 20 00 00 00 C HISTORICAL DATA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SET UP Serial Message Monitor 4 30 2008 2 51 PM Figure 9 11 Network Diagnostic Tool Serial Message Monitor SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 9 15 GPS MASTER Specifications AnsaldoSTS y AnsaldoSTS 9 16 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool 10 NETWORK DIAGNOSTIC TOOL WEBTOOL This section details the use of the ASTS USA OC and its web tools interface the Network Diagnostic Tool It provides information on maintenance and troubleshooting techniques necessary for personnel to maintain the OC in a manner that ensures operational integrity with a minimum of downtime 10 1 Minimum Requirements e PC with Ethernet port Ethernet crossover cable for direct connection to the Objec
136. IC BEGIN ASSIGN 1 TO CPS ENABLE ASSIGN IN 1 TO OUT 1 ASSIGN IN 2 TO OUT 2 ASSIGN IN 3 TO OUT 3 ASSIGN IN 4 TO OUT 4 ASSIGN IN 5 TO OUT 5 ASSIGN IN 6 TO OUT 6 NV ASSIGN THEMIXIO NV ANALOG INPUT VALID TO THEMIXIO NV ANALOG INPUT LED ASSIGN THEMIXIO ENABLED TO a ASSIGN THEMIXIO INPUT ENABLED TO c ASSIGN THEMIXIO NV ANALOG INPUT ENABLED TO d ASSIGN THEMIXIO PROXIMITY SENSOR 1 ENABLED TO e 13 4 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 A 7 AnsaldoSTS Sample Applications ASSIGN THEMIXIO PROXIMITY SENSOR 2 ENABLED TO f ASSIGN BI 1 TO BO 1 ASSIGN BI 2 TO BO 2 ASSIGN BI 3 TO BO 3 ASSIGN BI 4 BO 4 ASSIGN THEIN6OUT6 ENABLED TO g ASSIGN THEIN6OUT6 INPUT ENABLED i ASSIGN flash1 TO flash1 ASSIGN flash2 TO flash2 ASSIGN flash3 TO flash3 ASSIGN flash4 TO flash4 ASSIGN flash1 TO MII 10 20 BO1 ASSIGN flash2 TO MII 10 20 BO2 ASSIGN flash3 TO 10 20 ASSIGN flash4 TO MII 10 20 BO4 ASSIGN flash1 TO MII 20 10 BO1 ASSIGN flash2 MII 20 10 BO2 ASSIGN flash3 TO 20 10 ASSIGN flash4 TO MII 20 10 BO4 ASSIGN flash21 TO flash21 ASSIGN flash22 TO flash22 ASSIGN flash23 TO flash23 ASSIGN flash24 TO flash24 ASSIGN flash25 TO flash25 NV ASSIGN flash22 TO LED 1 NV ASSIGN flash23 TO LED 2 NV ASSIGN flash24 TO LED 3 NV ASSIGN flash25 TO LED 4 END LOGIC NUMERIC BEGIN BLOCK 1 TRIGGERS ON flash25 AND STALE AFTER 0 SEC EVALUATE Al 1 TO n21 END BLOCK
137. IMEOUT Allowable values are 30 to 10 000 milliseconds The default value is 1 000 milliseconds Message profile logical expression parameter 80 character maximum The default value is Allowable values are 1 000 to 60 000 milliseconds The default value is 60 000 MESSAGE TYPE Allowable values are 1 to 65 535 The default value is 1 MESSAGE VERSION Allowable values are 1 to 255 The default value is 1 Allowable values are 0 to 100 milliseconds The default value is 0 INTERBYTE NMEQUI milliseconds A setting of 0 selects 3 character times at the selected data rate Maximum number of bits that the wayside radio can accept for a WIU channel address Allowable values are 16 to 32 The default value is 24 EMP SOURCE ADDRESS WIU ADDRESS SIZE Maximum number of bits that the wayside radio can accept for a message MESSAGE TYPE SIZE type Allowable values are 4 to 16 The default value is 6 Maximum number of bits that the wayside radio can accept for a message MESSAGE VERSION SIZE version Allowable values are 4 to 8 The default value is 4 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 9 9 GPS MASTER Specifications 7 AnsaldoSTS COMMAND FUNCTION Vital payload size Total number of bits allocated to the vital data Allowable values are 64 to 184 The default value is 64 Size of the target fields in the WIU message Allowable values are 32 to 160 MESSAGE DIGEST SIZE The defaul
138. IT BOARD CAB RATE CODE SUBSET COMM CONSTANTS DEBUG PORT BAUDRATE ELSE ERROR EXECUTIVE FUNCTION FIXED GENISYS TIMER INPUTS INTERPOLATE KEYED LENGTH LOG MAP MASTER CHECKBACK MICROLOK MASTER MIN MSEC NOT NUMERIC OUTPUT NV BOOLEAN NV INPUT NV NUMERIC OUTPUT ODD OR OUTPUTS POINT POINT PRAGMA QUESTION ROUND SECURE MODE SHUTDOWN SPACE STANDARD SYSTEM THEN TO TRACK NAME TRIGGERS TYPE USER ADJUSTABLE ARRAYS BAUD BITS BOOLEAN CARRIER MODE CODED CONFIGURATION CRC SIZE DELAY RESET ENABLE EVALUATE FAST CODES FOR GENISYS MASTER IN16 INITIALIZED INTERBYTE TIMEOUT KEY OFF DELAY LAMP OUT LINK LOGIC MARK MASTER TIMEOUT MICROLOK SLAVE MOD NAME NUMERIC NUMERICS NV EVALUATE NV NUMERIC NV OUTPUT OFF OUT16 OVERRANGE POLLING INTERVAL PROGRAM RANGES SEC SET SLAVE STALE STATE TABLE TIME SINCE START TOGGLE TRACKA TRUNCATE UNDEFINED VARIABLES WATT WHEN WITH XOR YIELDS 11 12 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 77 AnsaldoSTS Application Programming 11 11 Boolean Expressions Equation Format ASSIGN 1ATP AND IBTP Where and are operands AND is an operator together they are a Boolean expression and I TP 15 the object or result Operators NOT Opposite AND amp Series OR Parallel Cross check Order of Precedence Parenthesis NOT AND OR XOR 11 11 1 Boolean Logic ASSIGN Statements The OC Bo
139. LE BAUD 38400 ADJUSTABLE STOPBITS 1 ADJUSTABLE PARITY NONE ADJUSTABLE KEY ON DELAY 0 ADJUSTABLE KEY OFF DELAY 0 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 13 15 13 16 Sample Applications 7 AnsaldoSTS ADJUSTABLE GRANT DELAY 10 MSEC ADJUSTABLE POINT POINT 1 VITAL STATION ADJUSTABLE MII ADDRESS 270 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 STATION NAME STATION 270 ADJUSTABLE PEER ADDRESS 160 ADJUSTABLE TIME STAMP 1 ADJUSTABLE ACK TIMEOUT 1000 MSEC ADJUSTABLE HEARTBEAT INTERVAL 2000 MSEC ADJUSTABLE INDICATION UPDATE CYCLE 2 ADJUSTABLE STALE DATA TIMEOUT 30000 MSEC ADJUSTABLE CLOCK MASTER 1 ADJUSTABLE UTC TIME STAMP 1 OUTPUT MII 270 160 BO1 INPUT MII 270 160 Bl1 VITAL STATION ADJUSTABLE MII ADDRESS 10 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 STATION NAME STATION 10 ADJUSTABLE PEER ADDRESS 20 ADJUSTABLE TIME STAMP 1 ADJUSTABLE ACK TIMEOUT 1000 MSEC ADJUSTABLE HEARTBEAT INTERVAL 2000 MSEC ADJUSTABLE INDICATION UPDATE CYCLE 2 ADJUSTABLE STALE DATA TIMEOUT 30000 MSEC ADJUSTABLE CLOCK MASTER 1 ADJUSTABLE UTC TIME STAMP 0 OUTPUT MII 10 20 BO1 INPUT 10 20 11 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 A 7 AnsaldoSTS Sample Applications BOOLEAN BITS flash1 TIMER BITS flash1 2800 MSEC CLEAR 2800 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM FIXED DEBUG_PORT_ADDRESS 1 FIXED DEBUG_PORT_BAUDRATE 9600 ADJUSTABLE LOGIC_TIMEOUT 1500 MSEC APPLICATION VERSION 5 LOGIC BEGIN A
140. LOK Object Controller 1 5 Identifying the OC Because of the various I O options available with the OC ensure that the unit is the proper one for the specific installation before attempting to install the OC Check the part number and verify that it is the proper for the location Refer to Section 3 1 5 1 Object Controller Part Number N17700119 Object controller Part number N17700119 has a dongle that connects to the serial port on the front panel The dongle consists of a DB 9 connector EEPROM and a length of wire Refer to Figure 1 3 The length of wire is not connected electrically and is used to secure the dongle to a mounting surface The EEPROM contains verification data for the application and configuration for the object controller The DB 9 connector connects to the serial port or a write enable adapter SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 1 3 A Introduction 4 AnsaldoSTS The EEPROM on the dongle verifies that the maintainer has properly replaced and checked the object controller configuration before installation The dongle remains at the location and is connected to the replacement object controller To use the software in this manner the CONFIGURE ERROR system bit should be used to inhibit the CPS until the new configuration is confirmed See Section 10 6 3 and Section 11 9 For example ASSIGN CONFIGURE ERROR TO CPS ENABLE The dongle can only be programmed via the diagnostic port if a write enable adapter is
141. LOR FUNCTION HEALTH Green Indicates the OC s health this LED flashes at a rate of once per second when the unit is operating properly COM 1 TX Red Flashes to indicate that data being transmitted COM 1 RX Red Flashes to indicate that good data are being received Flashes to indicate that a good address and good data have COM1ERROR Red Indicates that there is an error with the received data COM 2 TX Red Flashes to indicate that data are being transmitted COM 2 RX Flashes to indicate that good data are being received COM 2 MSG RCVD Flashes to indicate that a good address and good data have COM 2 ERROR been received Indicates that there is an error with the received data Lee Red User defined in the application software LEDs The LED is ON when the wiring is good LEDs minute when it resets Indicates that Vital Inputs No 1 through No 6 are energized Green Power connection is at the upper board orange connector J1 on the rear of the unit OUT 1 outs Indi i No 1 through N ized OUT 3 ndicates that Vital Outputs o 1 through No 6 are energized Yellow Power connection is at the upper board gray connector J2 on OUT 4 OUT 5 the rear of the unit OUT 6 CPS Indicates that the Conditional Power Supply is operational supplying power to the vital outputs US amp S Logo Theis the power indicator and is ON when power is applied to 3 8 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 4 An
142. Link Information 2 of 3 9 6 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 AnsaldoSTS GPS MASTER Specifications NETWORK DIAGNOSTIC TOOL VERSION 1 40 N800306 0001 Microsoft Internet Explorer Home RUN TIME MONITOR Board Inform Link Information Free Run Variable Display Serial Message Monitor HISTORICAL DATA User Data Log Event Log Error Log Event Error Code Look Up SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SET UP Set Clock Reset Unit Configuration Link Information Figure 9 6 LINK INFORMATION WO 1 Receiver configuration reports received 1 Secondary Receiver configuration reports received 1 INMEA Interval and Message Mask Output Message received 1 Packet broadcast mask reports received 1 Self survey reports received 1 Primary time reports received 101665 Secondary time reports received 101666 PPS characteristics reports received 1 PPS width reports received 1 response error count 0 Hardware detected receive errors in a complete message 0 Receiver overrun error count 0 Hardware error detected at interrupt level 0 Receieve buffer overflow error count 0 FIFO overflow error count 0 Escape error count 0 Message length error count 0 Unsupported message count 10173 Unsupported message subheader count 0 Invalid message format count 0 Receiver timeout count 0 Maximum bytes removed from FIFO 2 SM 9494 Rev 7 F
143. Lists gt CODED OUTPUTS lt Toggle Statements gt LOG lt ltems to log gt CONSTANTS lt Constant definitions gt ARRAYS lt Array definitions gt CONFIGURATION lt Configurations gt LOGIC BEGIN lt Boolean statements gt END LOGIC TABLES BEGIN lt Table definitions gt END TABLES NUMERIC BEGIN lt Numeric blocks gt END NUMERIC END PROGRAM Figure 15 1 Typical Object Controller Application High Level Format 15 2 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 A E AnsaldoSTS Examining an Application Program 15 2 Reviewing a MICROLOK Object Controller Program s Structure Refer to Section 3 2 Program Structure in SM 6800D Refer to the sample application in Section 15 2 15 2 1 Program Title Refer to Section 3 4 Program Title in SM 6800D Every OC program must begin with the title block and name An example of a program title OBJECT CONTROLLER PROGRAM lt name gt 15 2 2 Interface Section Overview Refer to Section 3 5 Interface Section in SM 6800D Example of a program s interface section INTERFACE LOCAL Local I O Definitions gt COMM lt Link Definitions gt 15 2 3 Local I O Definition The OC unit imposes a physical limit of two I O boards maximum plus an SCC board The application can define at most three I O boards Thus no more than three I O boards could be enabled in any single configuration Different types of I O boards are placed in differe
144. Low Voltage Arrester N N451552 0201 High Voltage Arrester Figure 3 17 Standard Inputs and Outputs for Part Number N17700103 with proximity sensor ordered separately Surge protection is required across each sensor input No V24ZA50 ASTS USA 735550 0016 ordered separately SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 3 27 OC Configurations 7 AnsaldoSTS OBJECT CONTROLLER 4 BIPOLAR INPUTS 4 BIPOLAR OUTPUTS 4 PROXIMITY SENSORS 2 ANALOG INPUTS J1 J3 ORANGE BI POLAR INPUTS 5 ON 6 ON A BI POLAR INPUTS Use primary lightning arresters when operating equipment external of the case N N451552 0101 Low Voltage Arrester PN N451552 0201 High Voltage Arrester PROX SEN 1 PROX 3 O O1 MOV V24ZA50 J735550 0016 PROX SEN 2 PROX SEN 4 PROXIMITY SENSOR NO NO CONNECT CONNECT ANALOG INPUT 1 ANALOG INPUT 2 0 to 30VDC 0 to 30VDC BI POLAR BIPOLAR OUTPUTS OUTPUTS Use primary lightning arresters when operating equipment external of the case 7 ON 3 AN N451552 0101 Low Voltage Arrester ZA N451552 0201 High Voltage S ON 4 ON 7 8 ON 3 Arrester JU JUMPER C JU JUMPER C Figure 3 18 Bipolar Inputs and Outputs for Part Number N17700103 Proximity sensor is ordered separately Surge protection is required across each sensor input
145. M 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 12 1 t Compiling an OC Application 7 AnsaldoSTS 12 1 1 Running the Compiler Refer to Section 4 3 Running the Compiler in SM 6800D The compiler converts an OC text ML2 file into an application MLP file The OC stand alone compiler mlk2comp exe should be copied to a user created top level directory of the PC drive for example CAMLK Comp b Address C AMLK Comp Folders X Name 2 Desk mlk2comp exe E DEMO BASIC ML2 gh Figure 12 2 Example File Structure The application to be compiled for example OBJ DEMO BASIC ML2 should also be placed into this directory NOTE When running the compiler from a DOS command line prompt ensure that the application source file name ML2 follows the DOS restrictions for file naming Open the Command Prompt DOS window typically found under the Windows programs Accessories folder and navigate to the compiler directory Refer to Figure 12 3 The compiler is invoked by entering the following command line prompt in the DOS window See arrow in Figure 12 3 MLK2COMP sourcefile ext 12 2 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 AnsaldoSTS Compiling an OC Application MLK_Comp C NMLK Comp MLK2COMP OBJ_DEMO_BASIC ML2 Object Controller Compiler Version 1 30 Friday April 25 2668 16 65 52 PROTOTYPE RELEASE ww Compiling OBJ_DEMO_BASIC ML2 Image si
146. MII Peer Physical Link Serial link P MII Peer Station Up Serial link PEER_2 MII Peer Physical Link Up Serial link PE MII Peer Physical Link Fail Serial link A System Reset Reset Completed System Reset CPS DOVYN System Bit Card not found internal RAM only Configuration warning saved configura System Reset CPS UP CPS Keys state Executive event Invalid timestamp time Reset from diagnostic cps clear fla MII Peer Physical Link Up Serial link PE MII Peer Station Up Serial link PEER_2 MII Peer Invalid acknowledge eed MII Peer Physical Link Up Serial link P MII Peer Station Up Serial link PEER_2 MII Peer Physical Link Up Serial link MII Peer Physical Link Fail Serial link System Reset Reset Completed s1nsnn2nn720000041 ________ CPS NOAN Syetan Bit Figure 10 12 1 24 2007 9 53 AM System Event Log Click the Reload button to refresh the display with the current event data stored on the OC 10 5 2 3 Clear Button Click the Clear button to clear the system event log A confirmation dialog box appears 10 5 2 4 Save Log Saving the logs to the local PC can be achieved in the following manner oft e Click in the logged data text area e Enter Control A on the keyboard to select all the text e Enter Control C to copy the selected text Open text editor i e Notepad Wordpad e With
147. ND FUNCTION LINK Declares an GPS protocol serial link and defines the link name The link name is a user selectable text string No default Not adjustable Specifies whether or not the GPS protocol link will be enabled on ENABLE unit initialization 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED No default GPS MASTER declares that this link will support the GPS protocol PROTOCOL No default Not adjustable PORT The physical port to which the GPS link will be attached The GPS may be assigned to Port 1 or 2 There is no default The data rate at which the link will operate Available selections are BAUD 4800 7200 9600 19200 and 38400 bits per second The default rate is 9600 Specifies the elapsed time after which the serial communication link between master and slave is declared failed when no valid STALE DATA TIMEOUT messages between the master and slave have been processed Allowable values are 5 000 to 600 000 milliseconds The default value is 300 000 milliseconds Allowable values are 5 000 to 60 000 milliseconds The default LINK TIMEOUT value is 60 000 milliseconds Specifies the time a master protocol handler will wait for a response after addressing a slave This delay must be long enough to accommodate the worst expected communication delays imposed by the communication circuit Consult documentation provided by the communication equipment supplier for specific information The default value is usually adequate but when using a communicat
148. NG AN APPLICATION PROGRANMN 15 1 Scope Of Section uu tints ee 15 1 15 1 1 Reference Maternal l RE Sasa 15 1 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 V w Table of Contents 7 AnsaldoSTS 15 2 Reviewing a MICROLOK Object Controller Program s Structure 15 3 15 24 Program y na aqsu ku qua qawa pakay kaqa 15 3 15 2 2 Interface Section Overview 15 3 15 2 3 Local u uu n u usaha usan 15 3 15 2 4 The Interface Section LOCAL 5 15 4 15 2 5 The Interface Section COMM 5 15 11 15 2 6 Timing Attributes coca eene tc dece dnce 15 11 15 2 7 SYSTEM Bits e monte poe it hu 15 12 15 2 8 Unit Configuration n enne 15 13 16 ERROR CODES 16 1 1 7 OPTIONAL PARTS LIST nee asap neat 17 1 18 TECHNICAL SUPPORT 18 1 List of Figures Figure 1 1 MIGROLOK Object Controler 1 2 Figure 1 2 The Front and Rear of the MICROLOK Object Controller 1 3 Figure 1 3 The Dimensions of the MICROLOK Object Controller
149. OC in a manner that ensures operational integrity with a minimum of downtime 12 1 Compiler The Serial Diagnostic Tool for Executive Versions 1 2 and earlier must be installed on your PC to compile an OC application by using the Run The Compiler button See Figure 12 1 Beginning with Executive Version 1 3 a new stand alone compiler is available to compile a 1 3 application NOTE While the 1 1 version compiler is usable over all software releases with a main revision of 1 x it is still advisable to use the same version compiler as the executive installed on the OC lax Unit Toole Back Split Advanceds Settings Help Please select one of the tools below Run time Monitor Free run Dynamic Serial i 9 rea Variable a Bit Variable Message Display is Display Monitor Historical Data User System System Merged Data Log Event Log Error Log Events Log System Adjustment Setup Software Application ez Link To Upload T Download Unit Set Time of Reset System Day Clack Q Object Configur Controller J ation Run The Leere Comparison code Help OffLine Tools 18 Run The Wi Compiler Figure 12 1 OC Serial Diagnostic Tool Main Menu S
150. Operation U n s n 3 2 Front Panel LED Op ration ridini u su e trea nete t 3 5 Front Panel 3 8 Front Panel LED Operation n nnns entente 3 11 Front Panel LED Operation 3 14 Front Panel LED Operation I n n nunana 3 17 Front Panel LED Operalion n n n n susan 3 20 Front Panel LED Operation s sas 3 23 Ethernet Interface Connector Pin Assignments 1 3 36 RS 232 9 3 38 Functional SpecifiGations 3 39 MIX PCB Functional Specifications 3 40 Inductive Proximity Sensors s sau 3 41 LED6 PCB Functional Specifications aa 3 42 Valid LED6 Vital Output 3 44 Fault Clearing 1 2 L ee as aut eee eves 3 45 GPS Protocol Link Compiler Declarations and Configuration Commands 9 3 CLASSC EMP Protocol Link Compiler Commands and Their Functions 9 9 CLASSC EMP Protocol Station Configuration Parameters 9 10 CLASSC EMP Protocol Link System Boolean Bit
151. S MASTER Specifications 7 AnsaldoSTS TRIMBLE CABLE ASSEMBLY 60148 DEUTSCH DB9P DB25P DB25S DB25P DB25S MMP 26C 221251 TXD P 255 52 2 VIOLET 2 2 3 5 3 3 BROWN 4 CONTROLLER RXD gt lt TXB 5 7 Q 7 7 BLACK 9 COM COMC E 1 S BATT ALES 9 S 9 BLUE D 21 gt 12 12 GRAY 7 GPS RXA RECEIVER 14 14 ORANGE lt RXB 6 TO 15 15 5 gt 15 WHITE EXTERNAL DEVICE 6 gt 16 YELLOW 5 xd TXA hs 17 gt 17 GREEN 8 TXA gt gt 21 BATT O W 11 B W 12 N B N B WOO Sdd Sdd 182 0006 01 RADIO Figure 9 1 Gold 9 1 1 2 GPS MASTER Protocol Link Destination The GPS MASTER protocol communication driver is defined in the Object Controller application program in a manner similar to that used to define other Object Controller communication protocol drivers The GPS MASTER configuration parameters are listed and described in Table 9 1 The GPS MASTER protocol communication driver communicates with single GPS receiver and unlike other Object Controller serial communication drivers does not support the definition of stations See application program example in Section 13 3 9 2 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS GPS MASTER Specifications Table 9 1 GPS Protocol Link Compiler Declarations and Configuration Commands COMMA
152. SEC APPLICATION VERSION 1 LOGIC BEGIN ASSIGN 1 TO CPS ENABLE ASSIGN flash1 TO flash1 ASSIGN flash2 TO flash2 ASSIGN flash3 TO flash3 ASSIGN flash4 TO flash4 ASSIGN flash5 TO flash5 NV ASSIGN flash1 TO LED 1 NV ASSIGN flash2 TO LED 2 NV ASSIGN flash3 TO LED 3 NV ASSIGN flash4 TO LED 4 ASSIGN NV IN 1 THELED6 RETEST LEDS NV ASSIGN flash4 TO NV OUT 1 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 13 7 29 Sample Applications 7 AnsaldoSTS ASSIGN IN 1 TO SIGNAL OUTPUT 1 ASSIGN IN 2 TO SIGNAL OUTPUT 2 ASSIGN IN 3 TO SIGNAL OUTPUT 3 ASSIGN IN 4 TO SIGNAL OUTPUT 4 ASSIGN IN 5 TO SIGNAL OUTPUT 5 ASSIGN IN 6 TO SIGNAL OUTPUT 6 ASSIGN SIGNAL GOOD 1 SIGNAL OUTPUT 1 TO OUT 1 ASSIGN SIGNAL GOOD 2 SIGNAL OUTPUT 2 TO OUT 2 ASSIGN SIGNAL GOOD 3 SIGNAL OUTPUT 3 TO OUT 3 ASSIGN SIGNAL GOOD 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT 4 TO OUT 4 ASSIGN SIGNAL GOOD 5 SIGNAL OUTPUT 5 TO OUT 5 ASSIGN SIGNAL GOOD 6 SIGNAL OUTPUT 6 TO OUT 6 END LOGIC END PROGRAM 13 8 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 A 7 AnsaldoSTS Sample Applications 13 3 GPS MASTER CLASSC EMP Example Program Object Controller Example Application OBJECT CONTROLLER Program EXAMPLE SITE ID STRING EXAMPLE PROGRAM DATE STAMP MARCH 07 2008 INTERFACE LOCAL BOARD THESCC Define and enable ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 the serial i TYPE SCC communication board BOARD THEIN6OUT6_1 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 TYPE IN
153. SOR 2 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 15 2 4 3 Defining Board Type IN6 OUT6 Address Class 16 Bit VPA A definition of this type of board looks like BOARD USER gt ADJUSTABLE FIXED ENABLE lt FLAG gt TYPE IN6 OUT6 OUTPUT bit list gt 1 6 Outputs INPUT lt bit list gt 1 6 Inputs ADJUSTABLE FIXED ENABLE lt FLAG gt Example Board Definition BOARD THEIN6OUT6 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 0 TYPE IN6 OUT6 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 15 7 Examining an Application Program AnsaldoSTS OUTPUT OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 INPUT 1 1 2 IN 3 IN 5 IN 6 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 15 2 4 4 Defining Board Type IN6 Address Class 16 Bit VPA A definition of this type of board looks like BOARD USER NAME gt ADJUSTABLE FIXED ENABLE lt FLAG gt TYPE IN6 INPUT lt bit list gt 1 6 Inputs Example Board Definition BOARD THEIN6 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 0 TYPE IN6 INPUT IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 5 IN 6 15 8 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 A AnsaldoSTS Examining an Application Program 15 2 4 5 Defining Board Type LED6 Example board definition Address Class 16 Bit VPA A definition of this type of board looks like BOARD lt USER NAME gt ADJUSTABLE FIXED ENABLE lt FLAG gt TYPE LED6 OUTPUT bit list gt 1 6 Outputs SIGNAL GOOD bit list gt 1 6 Inputs NV OUTPUT bit name 1 Output NV INPUT bit name 1 Input
154. SRC AD STATUS S V Data 8 STATUS 8 V Data 5 DMSN DMSN DMSN DMSN DMSN DMSN DMSN DMSN DMSN DMSN DMSN DMSN DMSN DMSN DMSN 41 RCVMSN 42 SRC AD 42 RCVMSN 43 SRC AD 43 RCVMSN 44 SRC AD 44 RCVMSN 45 SRC AD 45 RCVMSN 46 SRC AD 46 RCVMSN 47 SRC AD 47 RCVMSN 48 SRC AD 48 RCVMSN 47 SRC AD 48 RCVMSN 49 SRC AD 48 RCVMSN 4a SRC AD 4a RCVMSN 49 SRC AD 4a RCVMSN 4b SRC AD 4b RCVMSN 4c SRC AD 4c RCVMSN 4d SRC AD 4d RCVMSN 4e SRC AD lt Serial Message Monitor 1 23 2007 10 16 AM Figure 10 10 The display may be scrolled up and down or left and right to view the complete contents on the screen Clicking on the Start button again restarts the monitor display Clicking on the Clear button clears the display Serial Message Monitor 10 10 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 C 7 AnsaldoSTS Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool 10 5 Historical Data These links lead to views which display data which an operating OC has collected and stored 10 5 1 User Data Log 10 5 1 1 User Data Log Display The User Data Log Figure 10 11 displays changes of selected bit and numeric variables as requested by the application or configuration 3 NETWORK DIAGNOSTIC TOOL VERSION 1 1 N800306 0001 Microsoft Internet Explorer Oj x USER DATA LOG CPS Down Home RUN TIME MONITOR 01 0007 01 071 33040 C824 F41A 092F 01 Lo
155. SSIGN 1 TO CPS ENABLE NV ASSIGN UTC CLOCK VALID TO LED 3 NV ASSIGN UTC CLOCK INVALID TO LED 4 ASSIGN flash1 flash1 ASSIGN flash1 TO MII 270 160 BO1 ASSIGN flash1 TO MII 10 20 BO1 NV ASSIGN MII 270 160 BO1 TO LED 1 NV ASSIGN 10 20 1 TO LED 2 END LOGIC END PROGRAM SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 13 17 Sample Applications Z AnsaldoSTS 77 AnsaldoSTS 13 18 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Sample Listing File 14 SANPLE LISTING FILE A sample listing file is included in this section 14 1 Sample Listing File Union Switch amp Signal Inc Object Controller Listing File Version 1 00 Application SAMPLE OBJECT_CONTROLLER APP compiled on Tue Sep 12 15 34 41 2006 CRC 8bde Checksum 8298 OBJECT CONTROLLER PROGRAM SAMPLE OBJECT_CONTROLLER APP SITE ID STRING PITTSBURGH LAB DATE STAMP JUNE 7 2006 INTERFACE LOCAL 10 BOARD THESCC 11 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 12 TYPE SCC 14 BOARD THEIN6OUT6 15 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 16 TYPE IN6 OUT6 17 18 OUTPUT OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 19 20 INPUT IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 21 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 22 23 BOARD THEMIXIO 24 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 25 TYPE MIXIO 26 27 OUTPUT BO 1 BO 2 BO 3 BO 4 28 29 INPUT 2 BI 3 814 30 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 31 32 NV ANALOG INPUT 1 33 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 34 ADJUSTABLE MINIMUM
156. STS 4 8 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Object Controller Configuration Setup 5 OBJECT CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION SETUP The OC can be configured programmed to suit several different applications The Digi communication ports must be assigned a unique address for identification This requires a change to the default Network Interface Adapter Configuration File niacfg ini Additional software changes may be required such as executive revisions application software required for site specific application and diagnostic software for troubleshooting 5 1 Configuring Tools for the OC Every OC comes pre loaded with default software and addressed ports To make modifications to the OC the following is required e Network Diagnostic Tool N800306 0001 This contains the application port configuration file event file Java file for the web tool nia configuration file and an image file e The Java Runtime Environment 1 4 2 e SM 9494 ASTS USA OC Service Manual Power calculator Object Controller Development System Tool compiler N800302 0001 These items are contained on a CD N800307 0001 packaged with the OC 5 2 Network Interface Adapters There are up to three Network Adapters on the OC They serve two distinct functions e Application Port Routing This function is used on the Ethernet Ports marked and COM2 See Figure 1 6 These ports transport Peer protocol messages to
157. Settings To change more settings than just the IP address the niacfg ini file must be edited On the MICROLOK Net Adapter Advanced Tools screen Figure 5 4 click on FLASHO0 directory link Several files will appear on the screen as shown in Figure 5 6 5 6 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 N 77 AnsaldoSTS Object Controller Configuration Setup FLASH0 Directory Total blocks 1845 Free blocks 488 Elock size 512 Total modes 1584 Free modes 1576 Name Type Size Date milevents dat File 161206 Thu Jan 1 00 00 00 1970 ndt htm File 762 Thu Jan 1 00 00 00 1970 File 384930 Thu Jan 1 00 00 00 1970 niac File 704 Thu Jan 1 00 00 00 1970 File 2326 Thu Jan 1 00 00 00 1970 symbolTable mle Figure 5 6 FLASHO Directory Left click on niacfg ini to save it to the PC See Figure 5 7 Typically the file can be saved to the PC desktop for ease of access SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 Object Controller Configuration Setup 4 AnsaldoSTS FLASH0 Directory Total blocks 1845 Free blocks 585 losd Block size 512 modes 744 Do you to open save this file Free inodes 735 niacfg ini Configuration Settings 704 bytes jar File imlevents dat File From 169 254 1 10 ini File Save Cancel
158. TATION 1 HEARTBEAT INTERVAL 1000 Vital Adjustable PEER1 STATION 1 INDICATION UPDATE CYCLE 5 Vital Adjustable PEER1 STATION 1 CLOCK MASTER 1 Vital Adjustable PEER2 MII Peer PEER2 Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable Point Point 1 Vital Adjustable Port 2 Vital Adjustable BAUD 38400 Non vital Adjustable StopBits 1 Non vital Adjustable 0 Non vital Adjustable Key On Delay 0 Non vital Adjustable Key Off Delay 0 Non vital Adjustable Debug Port Address Type 0 Fixed Debug Port Address OxO Fixed Grant Delay 10 Non vital Adjustable PEER2 STATION 2 Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable PEER2 STATION 2 TIME STAMP 1 Vital Adjustable MII PEER2 STATION 2 Station Address Type 1 Fixed PEER2 STATION 2 Station Address 1310720 Vital Adjustable PEER2 STATION 2 PEER ADDRESS 0 Vital Adjustable PEER2 STATION 2 Stale Data Timeout 3000 Vital Adjustable PEER2 STATION 2 ACK TIMEOUT 500 Vital Adjustable PEER2 STATION 2 HEARTBEAT INTERVAL 1000 Vital Adjustable PEER2 STATION 2 INDICATION UPDATE CYCLE 5 Vital Adjustable PEER2 STATION 2 CLOCK MASTER 1 Vital Adjustable System Level Configuration Parameters 14 14 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 4 AnsaldoSTS ApplicationChecksum 0 Vital Adjustable ExecutiveChecksum 0 Vital Adjustable Executive Version 0 Fixed Application Version Event Threshold 1 Event T
159. TEM VITAL IN 66 THESCC Selective Shutdown 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 67 THESCC Spare 1 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 68 THESCC Spare 2 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL IN 14 24 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 t 7 AnsaldoSTS 69 THEIN6OUT6_1 Enabled 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 70 THEIN6OUT6_1 Selective Shutdown Application EXAMPLE compiled on Thu May 22 14 42 26 2008 CRC 3e02 Checksum 60ac Page 9 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 71 6 6 1 Spare 1 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 72 6 6 1 5 2 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 73 THEIN6OUT6_1 Input Enabled 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 74 THEIN6OUT6_1 Error 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 75 VO0 0 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL 76 VOO 1 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL 77 VO0 2 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL 78 VOO 3 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL 79 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL 80 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL 81 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 VITAL 82 VIO 1 1 0 0 0 0 VIAL 83 10 2 1 0 0 0 0 VIAL 84 VIO 3 1 0 000 VIAL 85 10 4 1 0 000 VIAL 86 10 5 2 0 0 0 0 VITAL 87 6 6 2 Enabled 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 88 6 6 2 Selective Shutdown 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 89 THEIN6OUT6_2 Spare 1 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 90 6 6 2 Spare 2 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 91 THEIN6OUT6_2 Input Enabled 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 92 6 6 2 Error 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL 93 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL 94 VO1 1 0 0 000 VITAL 95 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 VITAL 96 VO1 3 0 0 0 0 0
160. The Network Diagnostic Tool is a web based ASTS USA designed software package that is used to interface with the system for monitoring and management It is used to upload an application program to the OC system and configure the OC during system commissioning 11 16 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 A 7 AnsaldoSTS Application Programming Other tools included in the Network Diagnostic Tool allow for monitoring and adjustment of system configuration items and viewing of event and error logs The Network Diagnostic Tool also obtains system status and historical information from the system log user log and error log and debug the application logic by displaying logic states as the program executes The Network Diagnostic Tool is a web based tool that must be used with a Java enabled version of Internet Explorer which is run on a laptop or desktop PC The PC is connected to the Ethernet WEB TOOL port The OC is accessed by its unique IP address SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 11 17 Application Programming Z AnsaldoSTS y AnsaldoSTS 11 18 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Compiling an OC Application 12 CONPILING AN OC APPLICATION This section details the use of the ASTS USA Off Line Tools of the Serial Diagnostic Tool part number N8003020001 and their interface with the OC It provides information on maintenance and troubleshooting techniques necessary for personnel to maintain the
161. Two terminals are provided for each polarity of the battery input so that the input wires can be doubled to reduce the voltage drop The high power CPS eliminates the need for a VCOR relay when the fail over to red function is not required Table 3 15 presents the specifications for the LED6 board Table 3 15 LED6 PCB Functional Specifications PARAMETER VALUE Battery Input Voltage Range 9 8 to 16 2VDC Minimum wire size 16 Maximum wire size 12 Battery Leads to J1 pins 1 4 WAGO connector limitation Maximum length of 16 wire 25 feet using 2 wires for B12 and 2 wires for N12 Battery Input Power 84 watts maximum continuous 3 LED signals on at same time 7 amps at 12 volts Battery Input Fuse 15 amp slow blow J7100380025 12 2VDC Regulated when input battery is High Powered CPS Output Voltage above 11 volts 3 0 amps maximum from each output High Powered CPS Output Current terminal on orange connector J1 Total 6 5 amps maximum High Powered CPS Output Power 80 watts maximum continuous 3 LED signals on at same time 2000 between battery input high Isolation Voltage powered CPS output Efficiency 85 with output power at 80 watts 3 42 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS OC Configurations The isolation between the battery input and the high powered CPS output is safety critical Do not connect the high powered CPS terminals on J1 pins 11 and 12 to the battery N12 terminals
162. URRENT PROTECTION PCB O NON VITAL OUTPUT LOAD 200 OHMS MIN NO CONNECT PUSH BUTTON NV OUTPUT CLEAR FAULT L OPTIONAL PUSHBUTTON NOT PART OF THE OBJECT CONTROLLER SHOWN AS AN EXAMPLE OF A MANUAL RESET NV SEE NOTE FOLLOWING FIGURE 2 23 OOOOO RGIS Figure 3 23 Standard Outputs for Part Numbers N17700115 and N17700116 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 3 33 ERE gt w OC Configurations 7 AnsaldoSTS STANDARD ISOLATED INPUTS J3 ORANGE INPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 9 BATTERY 9 8 16 2V INPUT 10 CPS OUT 1 INPUT 11 CURRENT REGULATOR CPS OUT 2 CPS OUT 3 INPUT 12 CPS OUT 4 CPS OUT 5 CPS OUT 6 5 p um CPS CONNECT ces 2 21 STANDARD J ISOLATED OUTPUTS GRAY LED CURRENT gt IN 1 OUTPUT 7 IN 2 IN 3 OUTPUT 8 IN 4 IN 5 PROTECTION IN 6 n m m PCB OUT 1 CONNECT lt _____ OUT 3 OUTPUT 9 OUT 4 NON VITAL OUTPUT LOAD OUT 5 OUTPUT 10 200 OHMS MIN OUT 6 vw NO CONNECT OUTPUT 11 PUSH BUTTON NV OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT H12 VBAT OPTIONAL PUSHBUTTON NOT PART OF THE OBJECT CONTROLLER SHOWN AS AN EXAMPLE OF A MANUAL RESET SEE NOTE FOLLOWING THIS FIGURE Figure 3 24 Standard Inputs and Outputs for Part Numbers N17700117 and N17700118 3 34 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 A 7 AnsaldoSTS OC Configurations NOTE In Figure 3 23
163. WOO N3399 uouua SSN 8 XH SSN xu Woo di 8 Q IXXXXX 9 OVW 71001 83 13NH3H13 Ape 8 T dl 1 lo 0 hooo 0000 5 OVW 2 WOO W IXXXXX ssauaqav L WOO r uasn 9 nH 2 uasn vino t wasn sino o o oO o o O O ofo O O rara HL1V3H N 19340 30 10U9IN ama 037 037 5890 MOTI3A saat Ind no Naau5 sq311ndNI MOTI3A sqa11nd1no 9939 sda LAdNI ce H Object Controller N17700108 Front and Rear Panels 3 13 Figure 3 7 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 E OC Configurations 7 AnsaldoSTS Table 3 6 Front Panel LED Operation Part numbers N17700111 Figure 3 8 and N1770112 Figure 3 9 LED LED DESIGNATION COLOR PONE NON HEALTH Green Indicates the OC s health this LED flashes at a rat
164. al will be set 1 If all signals connected to a LED6 board good the front panel green fault LED will be off 3 2 3 4 Troubleshooting Notes Field Testing Open Signal Detection When field testing a system for detecting open signals special attention should be made to how the open wiring condition is created If the maintainer attempts to open a circuit by removing a ring terminal from a tall AAR stud many makes and breaks will usually occur This can cause the OC system to log Shift Test events and possibly a Shift Test Critical Error This occurs because the signal s output is unstable during the LED6 Board circuit diagnostics The maintainer can choose to ignore the logged events or break the circuit in a quicker manner Operation without Constant Current Source Connected During the initial system installation it is necessary that all required constant current sources be powered and connected to the LED6 board If there is an attempt to turn on a signal that is not connected to a constant current source a Critical Error will be detected and the OC System will reset The OC s System Event Log will record an undefined state error in the ON state 3 46 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS OC Configurations 3 2 4 Coded Input Board Specification The Object Controller is able to detect a coded state for inputs that are coded at a rate of 50 to 75 cycles per minute in addition to steady state OFF and ON
165. aldoSTS Network Adapter Configuration niacfg ini Flash erase Delete Files Flash BOTH THESE OPTIONS DELETES ALL FILES THE FLASH Try to use Delete Files first If the file system is still not working then try Erase Flash Erase the flash only if deleting the files does not work After Erasing the Flash it will automatically reboot You can upload files after it finishes booting It does not have to reboot after deleting files You can upload files after the files have been deleted Figure 8 2 Erase Flash Function Confirmation Page 6 First try to correct the problem by deleting the configuration file If that works upload a new configuration file See Section 5 6 3 If deleting the configuration file does not correct the problem click the Erase Flash button The system will delete the configuration file if it is not already deleted and then reboot the Object Controller thereby erasing the settings in Flash memory After the Object Controller reboots you can upload any configuration file which may be the Factory default SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 8 9 Network Adapter Configuration niacfg ini Z AnsaldoSTS y AnsaldoSTS 8 10 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS GPS MASTER Specifications 9 GPS MASTER SPECIFICATIONS OC Executive Version 1 3 and higher allow for the following GPS time setting features NOTE GPS Protocol will be
166. ample Program Object Controller Test Application E OBJECT CONTROLLER Program GPS PEER TEST SITE ID STRING GPS LAB TEST DATE STAMP MARCH 4 2009 INTERFACE LOCAL BOARD THESCC ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 TYPE SCC BOARD THEMIXIO ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 TYPE MIXIO OUTPUT BO 1 BO 2 BO 3 4 INPUT 1 2 BI 3 814 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 NV ANALOG INPUT 1 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 ADJUSTABLE MINIMUM THRESHOLD 12 2 0 0 30 0 ADJUSTABLE MAXIMUM THRESHOLD 16 7 0 0 30 0 18 14 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Sample Applications PROXIMITY SENSOR 1 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 0 PROXIMITY SENSOR 2 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 0 COMM LINK GPS_MASTER ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 PROTOCOL GPS MASTER ADJUSTABLE PORT 2 ADJUSTABLE BAUD 9600 ADJUSTABLE STOPBITS 1 ADJUSTABLE PARITY ODD ADJUSTABLE STALE DATA TIMEOUT 350000 MSEC ADJUSTABLE LINK TIMEOUT 60000 MSEC ADJUSTABLE MASTER TIMEOUT 2000 MSEC ADJUSTABLE POLLING INTERVAL 800 MSEC ADJUSTABLE UTC CLOCK RECOVERY WINDOW 4 ADJUSTABLE INTERBYTE TIMEOUT 0 MSEC ADJUSTABLE DYNAMICS CODE 4 ADJUSTABLE MINIMUM SIGNAL 2 0 ADJUSTABLE MAXIMUM PDOP 8 0 ADJUSTABLE POSITION LATITUDE 40 43389623281269 ADJUSTABLE POSITION LONGITUDE 79 9674354574159 ADJUSTABLE POSITION ALTITUDE 201 832884109579 ADJUSTABLE POINT POINT 1 LINK MII PEER1 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 PROTOCOL MII PEER ADJUSTABLE PORT 1 ADJUSTAB
167. and Figure 3 24 there is a Push Button displayed that does not come as a part of these packages The Push Button is used as an example of what be connected to the Non Vital Input connection of the LED6 PCB When coupled with application logic the optional push button shown in the figures can be used to reset the signal failover This push button setup mimics the reset button located on the MICROLOK LED 12 board Please note that an external push button reset is not required on the OC The signal failover reset function can be performed completely within the application logic For a more detailed representation on how to wire the IN6 OUT6 PCB for standard inputs outputs refer to Figure 3 19 and for bi polar inputs and outputs refer to Figure 3 20 NOTE The wiring diagrams for Figure 3 19 and Figure 3 20 show how to wire the IN6 OUT6 PCB in the top position using J1 and J2 but for 17700117 and N17700118 the ING6 DUT6 must be in the bottom position using J3 and J4 3 1 1 Ethernet Port Pin Orientation The pin orientation of the Ethernet connector is shown in Figure 3 25 The pin assignments are presented in Table 3 10 3 1 2 Power Connections The power connectors and the WAGO connectors are shown in Figure 3 26 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 3 35 OC Configurations 7 AnsaldoSTS Figure 3 25 Ethernet Interface Pin Orientation Table 3 10 Ethernet Interface
168. and a destination address of 20 PROTOCOL ADJUSTABLE PORT 2 ADJUSTABLE MILADDRESS 20 STATION NAME STATION_2 ADJUSTABLE PEER ADDRESS 10 This definition is the other end of the communication Messages sent from this link have a source address of 20 and a destination address of 10 In the example the Digi with address 192 168 1 16 should be connected to PORT 1 and the Digi with address 192 168 1 17 should be connected to PORT 2 With PAIR routing the following definition would work Digi device configured with IP 192 168 1 17 in the header of the niacfg ini file contains a UDP table entry 192 168 1 16 60000 000A 0014 Digi device configured with IP 192 168 1 16 in the header of the niacfg ini file contains a UDP table entry 192 178 1 17 60000 0014 000A 8 3 4 TCP Options Entries in this section are specified as lt local_port gt lt remote_ip_addr gt lt remote_port gt lt mlk_addr_list gt 8 6 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 A E AnsaldoSTS Network Adapter Configuration niacfg ini TCP table entries are identical to UDP table entries except that TCP specifies an IP port that is used for inbound connections Commonly referred to as a Listening port This ensures that data connections can be initiated by either the Object Controller being configured or the remote Object Controller If creating a third party device to communicate with the Object Controller it should be noted that outbound TCP co
169. ange is defined from 0 0 to 30 0 volts lt board name gt Proximity Sensor x states whether the Proximity Sensor is Set Touching or Clear Not Touching If the lt board name gt Proximity Sensor x Indeterminate is set this states that the Proximity Sensor is in an invalid state and the lt board name gt Proximity Sensor x bit should be clear Target indication for any vital Object Controller application shall always be based on the current status of two proximity sensors inputs For vital applications it is recommended that the application should be written so that a mismatch of stable paired proximity sensor inputs 1 one sensor input indicating and one sensor not indicating results in the application logic interpreting the instability as a failure of one or more of the connected sensors In this event the application logic will latch the condition to ensure a maintenance person is required to physically inspect the device s and make the needed repairs before normal operation is restored Example Board Definition BOARD THEMIXIO ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 0 TYPE MIXIO OUTPUT BO 1 BO 2 BO 3 BO 4 INPUT 1 2 BI 3 Bl 4 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 NV ANALOG INPUT Al 1 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 15 6 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 5 AnsaldoSTS Examining an Application Program ADJUSTABLE MINIMUM THRESHOLD 10 0 ADJUSTABLE MAXIMUM THRESHOLD 16 0 PROXIMITY SENSOR 1 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 PROXIMITY SEN
170. any as four string segments may specified Each string segment may be up to 32 bytes long The default value is the NULL string ENABLE RADIO CONFIG STRING Broadcast interval of a WIU message with current device status Allowable values are 250 to 60 000 milliseconds The default value is 1 000 milliseconds BROADCAST INTERVAL Interval in which test status message are transmitted Allowable values are 10 000 to 3 600 000 milliseconds The default value is 60 000 milliseconds OUTPUT Defines a list of Boolean values logic bits to be sent serially The list may include 1 to 128 Boolean bits 9 10 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 TEST INTERVAL 3 AnsaldoSTS GPS MASTER Specifications 9 1 2 4 55 Protocol Link System Boolean Bits The Object Controller application compiler automatically generates six Boolean bits that provide information on CLASSC EMP link status to the application program or allow the application program to change the status of the CLASSC EMP link These bits are listed and described in Table 9 4 Table 9 4 CLASSC EMP Protocol Link System Boolean Bits EXPRESSION FUNCTION A read only Boolean bit that indicates to the application whether or lt link_name gt ENABLED not the CLASSC EMP link is enabled in the link configuration 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED A Read Write Boolean bit that allows the application program to sen nes disable a CLASSC EMP Link lt link_name
171. are defined as Adjustable 3 NETWORK DIAGNOSTIC TOOL VERSION 1 1 N800306 0001 Microsoft Internet Explorer b loj x BOARD INFORMATION Home RUN TIME MONITOR Board The8CC Board Type SCC Board Information Board Address 1000 0000 No Status Availaible Link Information Board Name Bl BO NUM 1 Free Run Variable Display Board Type IN6 OUT6 Board Address 0100 0000 Serial Message Monitor Input D is Clear HISTORICAL DATA Input 1 is Clear Input 2 is Clear Input 3 is Clear Input 4 is Clear Event Log Input 5 is Clear Output 0 is Clear Error Log Output 1 is Clear Output 2 is Clear Output 3 is Clear Output 4 is Clear Output 5 is Clear User Data Log Event Error Code Look Up SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SET UP Set Clock Reset Unit Board Name Bl NUM 2 Board Type IN6 OUT6 O04 0 nan Configuration Board Information 1 24 2007 9 54 AM Figure 10 5 Board Information Display 10 4 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 AnsaldoSTS Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool 10 4 2 Link Information The Link Information Display Figure 10 6 presents the status information about the Communication Links that are enabled Communication Links or Serial Links are defined in the application logic They may also be Enabled Disabled during the configuration process if the Serial Links are defined as Adjustable E NETWORK DIAGNOSTIC TOOL VERSION 1 1 N800306 0001 Microsof
172. ation file on hand to upload after deleting the existing configuration file or rebooting the Object Controller See Section 5 5 for information on downloading an existing configuration file or Section 8 1 for the factory default Web tool configuration file or Section 8 2 for a factory application port configuration file The factory niacfg ini file is on the CD that is shipped with the unit SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 8 7 4 Network Adapter Configuration niacfg ini AnsaldoSTS 2 Access the Object Controller Configuration Home Page See Section 5 4 for the procedure 3 Click on the Network Adapter Advanced Options link Figure 5 3 4 Advanced Tools page click on the Erase link Figure 8 1 The system displays a password box Figure 8 1 MICROLOK II Net Adapter Advanced Tools Network Settings Displav network settines Connect to 169 254 1 10 7 21 xl PEER Routing Statistics 4 E Reboot Digi AWS User erase Upload Upload niacfg in password eese RANO directory List FLASHO directory List Remember my password Erase Erases the FLASH cm Figure 8 1 Erases Flash Function Password Dialog Box 5 Type in erase for both the user name and password and click OK The system will display the confirmation screen shown in Figure 8 2 8 8 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 Ans
173. ault Gateway Save Cancel Figure 6 4 Device Password Dialog Box A case sensitive password USSRoot is required to save the new IP address Type the password and click OK 6 4 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Acquiring the IP address of an OC Ethernet Port 3 Digi Device Discovery Open web interface IP Address MAC Address Name Device 29 169 254 1 10 00 40 9D 2B CB 57 Microlok II Network Adapter Telnet to command line Configure network settings Restart device Other Tasks Refresh view _ Help and Support Configure Network Settings The network settings can be assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate network settings Details Device Microlok Network Adapter Microlok II Network Adapter Digi Device Discovery xj Configured Static u IP address 169 254 1 10 Invalid network configuration network or host portion is invalid Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway 0 0 0 0 Serial ports 0 Firmware Microlok Networ Default Gateway Save Cancel Figure 6 5 Error Dialog Box If changes other than setting an IP address are to be made then the niacfg ini file must be modified by a qualified user See Section 5 5 for further details 6 2 Accessing the Network Diagnostic Tool Left click on Open web interface or
174. ave COM 2 ERROR Indicates that there is an error with the received data Red User defined in the application software Ethernet port Yellow Indicates correct wiring between this port and a hub The LED LED s is ON when the wiring is good Ethernet port Green Turns ON at power up and turns OFF after approximately 1 LED s minute when it resets FAULT n a fault within the LED signal s or a problem with the Indicates that LED Signal Outputs No 1 through No 6 are energized A fault condition is indicated by three quick on pulses followed by a longer off period LED signal connections are at the upper board gray connector J2 on the rear of the unit CPS Red Indicates that the Conditional Power Supply is operational US amp S Logo Blue cua power indicator and is ON when power is applied to SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 3 17 77 AnsaldoSTS YOLOANNOO H3MO1 quvog 9 821 3SNV O YOLOANNOO 9 G31 5 VSL OC Configurations TANVd MOVE n 9L 91 vi sr e eB NOLOSNNOO m OL 5 asna i 3snd 9 4 NO HOLIMS Ue k J 4J0 NO L or SON 1d XX 0001 05008 SHVMLAOS 3AI1n03X3 900
175. bility Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate network settings Details Device Microlok Network Adapter Microlok II Network Adapter MAC Address 00 40 90 28 CB 57 Configured Static Obtain network settings automatically IP address 169 254 1 10 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway 0 0 0 0 IP Address 153 254 lt ports 0 Firmware Microlok Networ Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway n Save Cancel r Manually configure network settings Figure 6 3 Configure Network Settings Dialog Box Once the new IP address is entered click Save and the Password dialog box opens Figure 6 4 An incorrect entry results in an error dialog box shown in Figure 6 5 If this is the case click OK and re enter a valid IP address SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 6 3 w Acquiring the IP address of an OC Ethernet Port AnsaldoSTS IP Address MAC Address Name Device 169 254 1 10 00 40 9D 2B CB 57 Microlok II Network Adapter Configure Network Setting s The network settings can be assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate network settings Device Enter Device F Addre n C Obtainr WA Manuall Password IP Address Def
176. c State 0300 0300 0100 0200 0001 0300 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 16 1 5 Error Codes 4 AnsaldoSTS ERROR MESSAGE ACTUAL ERROR CODE Object Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Invalid Proximity Sensor 2206 2000 Diagnostic Test Object Controller Mixed Board B6b Invalid Analog database start value 2206 0222 701 Object Controller Mixed I O Board B3b Invalid Proximity Sensor 2208 Diagnostic Test selected _ Object Controller Mixed I O Board 836 Invalid read data for Proximity 2208 om Sensor database values E Object Controller Mixed I O Board B7b Invalid read data for Proximity Sensor valid range values 2206 9509 0101 Object Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Invalid Echo check 2206 0100 Object Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Output compare Failure 2206 042 Object Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Proximity Sensor data compare pare ooo Object Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Proximity Sensor data compare 2206 Failure Data 1 B6x Data 2 B7x Object Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Input data compare Failure 2206 0500 0000 Object Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Output data compare Failure 2206 0600 0000 Mixed I O Board B2b Invalid state for Proximity Sensor 2206 2000 Object Controller Mixed I O Board 8826 Invalid Board CPS Status Check
177. cates correct wiring between this port and a hub LEDs The LED is ON when the wiring is good Ethernet Port G Turns ON at power up and turns OFF after approximately 1 minute when it reen LEDs resets Indicates that Vital Inputs No 1 through No 6 are energized Power connection is at the upper board orange connector J1 on the rear of the unit Indicates that Vital Outputs No 1 through No 6 are energized Power Yellow connection is at the upper board gray connector J2 on the rear of the unit Indicates that Vital Inputs No 7 through No 12 are energized Power connection is at the lower board orange connector J3 on the rear of the unit Indicates that Vital Outputs No 7 through No 12 are energized Power connection is at the lower board gray connector J4 on the rear of the unit CPS Indicates that the Conditional Power Supply is operational supplying power to the vital outputs US amp S Logo This is the power indicator and is ON when power is applied to the unit Yellow SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 3 23 77 AnsaldoSTS OC Configurations TANVd MOV TANVd LNOdd sq31 LNdNI ad N3399 MEN 8 Y HOLS
178. compiler searches by default for a ML2 file in browse Development System dialog box NOTE The compiler is a DOS based program and as such has a character limit for a file path Do not save application files in lower sub directories when accessing them via the OC Diagnostic Tools Save the file to a main folder The completed application source file is then processed by the OC logic compiler The compiler reads the source file and verifies that the content of the file follows the prescribed format and conventions The compiler produces an application file MLP file extension and a listing file CMLL extension that contains a summary of the application program as well as any errors detected in the source file Based on the severity and types of errors detected by the compiler the application source file may need to be corrected using the text editor and run through the compiler again The previous steps are repeated until the compiler produces an acceptable application file The compiled application file is transferred to a laptop computer and then uploaded to the appropriate OC installation during system startup The OC Diagnostic Tools program is used to do this 11 2 Programming Mechanics OC programs are free format and are not case sensitive Comments which is text ignored by the compiler begin with a and end with a V Single line comments may be identified with Additionally comments may be delimited wit
179. connected between the dongle and the serial port See Section 11 for programing information You must change an adjustable prarmeter and then change it back in order for the tool to resave the configuration Figure 1 3 Dongle and Write Enable Adapter 1 6 Installation Requirements 1 6 1 Tools Needed A 4 32 inch or 3 5mm flat blade screw driver is used to insert wiring into the WAGO connectors A special tool for this insertion tool WAGO No 210 120 ASTS USA No J039000 0159 is also available if desired The unit itself is mounted to the wall or shelf using standard bolts or screws 1 4 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 ej 4 AnsaldoSTS Introduction 1 6 2 Site Preparation The OC is normally installed in the wayside house The site should already have been prepared for the OC The wiring and connectors should already be in and the mounting area should provide ample area to accept the OC The overall dimensions and the mounting footprint for the OC are shown in Figure 1 4 1 6 3 Mounting The OC can be either shelf mounted or wall mounted It is mounted the same in either orientation Refer to Figure 1 4 Connecting the MICROLOK Object Controller to the System To connect the OC to the system connect a 12VDC source capable of providing at least 2 0 amps Refer to Section 3 1 2 to the input power connector supplied and plug it into the input power receptacle on the rear of the OC Figure 1 5 If the OC cannot be i
180. d It is strongly recommended that before uploading new Digi Firmware the Flash File System should be erased Refer to Section 8 4 on how to erase the Flash File System 1 Open a command window From the Start menu go to Run and type cmd and press enter 2 Navigate from the command window to the directory containing the new image bin file To navigate use the cd change directory command 1 Program Files to go to the program files directory A user may view all files and folders in the current directory by typing dir 3 Once the user is at the proper directory ftp the firmware by typing in ftp IP ADDRESS where IP ADDRESS is the IP address of the Digi 4 Login as none be sure to include the and characters 5 Type bin 6 Type put image bin 7 When the transfer is complete the user will see a successful message in the command window The user may type quit to close the command window 8 The unit will program itself and reboot in ten seconds The green LED on the Digi will turn on while the Digi is booting When the Digi has completed the boot process the green LED will turn off and the yellow LED will flicker for a moment The Digi will be fully operational about ten seconds after the yellow LED turns on again 5 9 Changing Network Settings Modify file niacfg ini in the GENERAL section GENERAL IP 192 168 1 10 5 255 255 0 0 GATEWAYz192 168 1 1 DHCP is not s
181. d Communication Link s statistics are buttons to clear the defined links By clicking on the clear button the Network Diagnostic Tool will communicate with the OC to reset all statistics associated with said link to 0 Figure 10 7 Once this is done the user cannot retrieve the previous statistics x P c UI PEER_1 Cleared Applet Window Figure 10 7 Clear Link Statistics 10 4 3 Free Run Variable Display The Free Run Display Figure 10 8 lists the current values for selected variables and bits as well as a real time list of changes The values for all variables and bits are shown next to the variable The scrolling text represents real time changes E NETWORK DIAGNOSTIC TOOL VERSION 1 1 N800306 0001 Microsoft Internet Explorer E ZI n FREE RUN VARIABLE DISPLAY Home ID Symbol Value RUN TIME MONITOR 1 RESET 0 Board Information 2 QUICKRESET 0 Link Information KILL Free Run Variable Display CS Pta 5 CPS STATUS 0 6 USER RESTRICTED 0 7 ERROR RESTRICTED 0 Serial Message Monitor HISTORICAL DATA User Data Log 8 CONFIGURE ERROR 0 Event Log 9 LAMP RESET OPTION 0 Error Log 10 CLOCK FREEZE 0 Event Error Code Look Up 41 CLOCK SET 0 SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SET UP 12 PEER CLOCK SET 0 Set Clock 13 PCMCIAINSTALLED 0 Reset Unit 9 Configuration Resume Clear Polling Interval Free Variable Run 1 24 2007 9 52 AM Figure 10 8 Fre
182. d Unused Variable Summary Refer to Section 4 5 4 Unused Variable Summary in SM 6800D To call attention to variables that the system or the user defined but never used in logic the compiler generates a list of such bits Note however that I O points defined as SPARE do not appear in the list The list looks like the example that follows lt id number gt lt id name gt lt bit type gt 12 1 8 Bit Usage Summary Refer to Section 4 5 7 Bit Usage Summary in SM 6800D Information about each bit used in the system is displayed in a table Part of an example table follows ID ID Name FRONT BACK BLOCK TABLE CODE ASGN TARG VITAL 14 34R 0 0 0 0 0 ASGN VITAL OUT 123 1 3 0 0 0 ASGN VITAL INT 125 TRIG 0 0 1 1 0 ASGN VITAL INT 126 ERROR 0 0 0 0 0 23 NASGN NON Int 12 1 9 Numeric Usage Summary Refer to Section 4 5 8 Numeric Usage Summary in SM 6800D Information about each numeric used in the system is displayed in a table Part of an example table follows ID ID Name EVAL TARG VITAL 300 SPEED 1 EVAL VITAL OUT LINK SHARED OUT 10 364 ELAPSED 3 NEVAL INT 365 TRIG 5 IN VITAL IN LINK SHARED 11 25 12 6 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Compiling an OC Application 12 1 10 Board Summary Refer to Section 4 5 9 I O Board Summary in SM 6800D Note this information boards are summarized by board name and type as well as the state any configuratio
183. data Pre W2x Post W4x Path 2605 PESE 1 Object Controller LED6 IMON Shifted data Pre W2x Post W4x Path 1 2605 Object Controller LED6 VMON Shifted data Pre W2x Post W4x Path 1 2605 Post Post Object Controller LED6 IMON UnShifted data Pre W2x Post W4x Path 2605 FERE 2 Object Controller LED6 IMON Shifted data Pre W2x Post W4x Path 2 2605 Post Object Controller LED6 Board B2b Initialization Task CPS Mismatch t 2606 Object Controller LED6 Board B2b Initialization Task Startbit Mismatch t 2606 Object Controller LED6 Board B2b Delivery Task CPS Mismatch t 2606 Object Controller LED6 Board B2b Delivery Task Startbit Mismatch t 2606 Object Controller LED6 Board B2b Startbit Mismatch t 2606 Object Controller LED6 Board B2b Verification Task CPS Mismatch t 2606 0200 The following is a key to the Error Message column e byte number 0 7 e W word number 0 2 4 6 e double word or long word b board name e variable bit name e link name e d decimal value e u unsigned decimal value e value Object Controller LED6 UnShifted data Pre W2x Post W4x Path 2605 2 Object Controller LED6 VMON Shifted data Pre W2x Post W4x Path 2 2605 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 16 5 AW 77 AnsaldoSTS Error Codes e c ASCIIcharacter value t displays app
184. ddress Device Device Tasks 4169 254 1 10 00 40 9D 2B CB 57 Microlok II Network Adapter Open web interface Telnet to command line Configure network settings Restart device Other Tasks Refresh view Help and Support Details Microlok II Network Adapter Configured Static IP address 169 254 1 10 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway 0 0 0 0 Serial ports 0 Firmware Microlok II Networ 1 device 7 My Device Network Figure 6 2 Digi Device Discovery Main Screen NOTE Double click on the highlighted IP Address or click on Open web interface to open the Net Adapter WebTools utility The Digi Device Discovery tool allows the port address to be changed without having to download upload the niacfg ini file and eliminates the associated risks of corrupting the niacfg ini file Click on Configure Network Settings The Configure Network Settings dialog box opens Figure 6 3 and the new IP address is entered 6 2 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Acquiring the IP address of an OC Ethernet Port 4 Digi Device Discovery Device Tasks 28169 254 1 10 00 40 9D 2B CB 57 Microlok II Network Adapter Open web interface Telnet to command line Configure network settings Restart device Other Tasks Refresh view Configure Network Settings _ The network settings can assigned automatically if pour network supports this capa
185. dentified from either its label or from the figures in this manual that show the various configurations of the OC do not use the unit Insert the connectors to the orange and gray terminal boards in the proper input and output arrangement CAUTION Orange and gray connectors are keyed Check the keying before inserting into the unit Do not use excessive force to mate the connectors If too much force is applied the keys could be damaged With the terminal connectors secure and the power cord installed move the power switch to the ON position The USS logo Power LED blue on the sloping panel on the front of the OC should illuminate Figure 1 6 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 1 5 77 AnsaldoSTS Ay Introduction O O O O O O O O O 0000000000 O O O O O O 6 6 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 1 4 X 13 32 SLOTTED TYPICAL O O O O Q O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 0050 c L 12 98 NOTE ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES 4 The Dimensions of the MicROLOK Object Controller Figure 1 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 1 6 4 AnsaldoSTS KEYING PLUGS ON OFF SWITCH FUSE INPUT POWER CONNECTOR UNION SWITCH amp 8
186. ding the macfg im file you must select Reboot Digi from the Advanced page To upload a new Executive or Application upload the file to RAMO Then from the Advanced or main page select MLK Upload The page will load while the file 15 being uploaded This can take as long as 20 minutes When the upload process completes a status page will show the results Figure 7 2 File Upload Page 3 Click Browse and select the Executive sr or Application mlp to upload Figure 7 3 File Upload Select a directory File to Upload CADocuments and Settings Administrator Desktop OBJ DEMO BASIC mlp Browse Upload To change the configuration upload the niacfg ini file that contains the new settings to FLASHO To make the new settings take effect after uploading the niacfg in file you must select Reboot Digi from the Advanced page To upload a new Executive or Application upload the file to RAMO Then from the Advanced or main page select MLK Upload The page will load while the file is being uploaded This can take as long as 20 minutes When the upload process completes a status page will show the results Figure 7 3 File Upload 4 Click Upload The directory will display the uploaded file See Figure 7 4 7 2 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 AnsaldoSTS Uploading a MICROLOK OC Executive or Application RAMO0 Directory Total blocks 5913 Free blocks 5013 Block size 512 Tota
187. dress http 169 254 1 10 advanced htm v Links Google 52 25 97 Bookmarks 51 blocked 7 Check Settings MICROLOK II Net Adapter Advanced Tools PEER Routing Statistics COM statistics used to ensure the Net Adapter is communicating with the Object Controller Network Settings Display network settings MLK Upload Reboot Digi Upload Upload niacfg ini or Executive or Application directory List RAMO directory FLASHO directory List FLASHO directory Erase Erases the FLASH File System amp Internet Figure 7 1 Advanced Tools Page SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 1 Uploading MICROLOK OC Executive or Application 7 AnsaldoSTS 2 Select RAMO from the Select a directory drop down menu Figure 7 2 CAUTION By default this screen Figure 7 2 on opening displays FLASH0 in the directory box Ensure that RAMO is selected before uploading an application or the application will be loaded into FLASHO where it has no use and will simply consume available memory space on the Digi Snagit gt Address http 169 254 1 10 upload htm File Upload Select a directory FLASH0 Directory File to Upload To change the configuration upload the niacfg ini file that contains the new settings to FLASHO make the new settings take effect after uploa
188. e Variable Display 10 6 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 2 AnsaldoSTS Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool 10 4 3 1 Variable Bit Filtering To view system variables in the text mode click on the Free run Variable Display button on the Network Diagnostic Tool menu found on the left hand column The free running variable display provides a list of variables and bits with a text based description of each variable s current status The user specifies which variables or bits are to be monitored There are two ways to do this 1 Click on the button The system moves all of the listed variables and bits to a point above the end of active symbols line Any variables and bits listed above this line are monitored and dynamically updated by the program variables or bits listed below this line are not dynamically updated 2 Move individual variables bits or blocks of variables bits to a point above the end of active symbols line To execute this double click on the variable or bit name This will cause the variable to be added to the list of current filtered variables to be monitored Figure 10 9 There are two ways to remove variables bits from the filtered list 1 Double click on the variable bit name This will move the selected variable or bit to a point below the end of the active symbols 2 Click on the None button The system moves all of the listed variables and bits to a point below the end of active symbols
189. e User Data Log to be stored externally Sound Onboard Audible Alarm e ALARM 1 at 2400 Hz when set There is no alarm available on the OC Sound Onboard Audible Alarm ALARM 2 at 1200 Hz when set There is no alarm available on the OC 15 14 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 77 AnsaldoSTS Error Codes 16 ERROR CODES The error codes in Table 16 1 will appear on the Network Diagnostic Tool display if there is a problem The event recorder will log in the event and display it on the tool when it is called NOTE Fields and bits in the Error Code shown in Table 16 1 as 2 indicate fields bits that that are meaningless to the error These fields bits have no bearing on the error and can be any value Table 16 1 Error Codes ROR CODE Unknown Object Controller I O t Code WOx W2x W4x W6x 220 D Object Controller Mixed I O Board B6b Echo Error t Expected Echo 2201 2201 W2x Actual Echo W4x Object Controller Mixed I O Board B6b Echo Error 2200 ____ 2211 Object Controller Mixed I O Board B6b Echo Error t Expected Echo 2201 2202 W2x Actual Echo W4x Object Controller Mixed I O Board B6b Echo Error 2201 2 Object Controller Mixed Board B2b Type Error 2202 oodF Object Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Proximity Sensor 1 in an 2203 0101 indeterminate state Object Controller Mixed Board B2b Prox
190. e of once per second when the unit is operating properly COM 1 TX Red Flashes to indicate that data being transmitted COM 1 RX Red Flashes to indicate that good data are being received Flashes to indicate that a good address and good data have COM 1 ERROR Indicates that there is an error with the received data COM 2 TX Flashes to indicate that data are being transmitted COM 2 RX Flashes to indicate that good data are being received Flashes to indicate that a good address and good data have COM 2 ERROR Indicates that there is an error with the received data User defined in the application software Red Indi Red Red Red been received LEDs The LED is ON when the wiring is good Port LEDs minute when it resets Indicates that Vital Inputs No 1 through No 6 are energized Green Power connection is at the upper board orange connector J1 on the rear of the unit 0585 Logo Tris ne power indicator and is ON when power is applied to NOTE All isolation is lost between the two outputs or inputs when configured as a bi polar pair 3 14 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 OC Configurations 4 AnsaldoSTS 39NVHO HOLO3NNOO TANVd MOVE Ta pe So XX
191. each event 1 2 and 3 are the available options determines the logging level for the event Level 1 is the lowest level and logs the least amount of information Each higher level logs all information within its own level as well as lower levels Each error class maintains its own logging level such that different logging levels can be set for the different error classes Events are placed in the logging levels based on sub class Scroll the screen down to access the remaining configuration options on this display The Timing parameters are set in the application program These parameters specify delay periods in milliseconds that are used by the system during normal operation Logic Timeout and following a manual reset of the system Delay Reset The PC Configuration fields are used to set the port address and baud rate for the OC CPU board diagnostic port The default settings are shown to the right of the individual fields The Password field enables the user to change the system password Use the Set button for this function 10 22 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 AnsaldoSTS Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool After modifying the information in one or more fields two pushbuttons near the bottom of the window become active The Apply Defaults button changes the data in all of the fields back to the default values as set in the application program The default value is shown to the right of each data field The Reset Changes butt
192. ebruary 2011 4 9 2009 6 00 PM Network Diagnostic Tool Link Information 3 of 3 7 GPS MASTER Specifications AnsaldoSTS 9 1 1 5 GPS Master Protocol Link Serial Message Monitor In the menu click on the link labeled Serial Message Monitor Select the appropriate link to monitor from the list on the left to monitor Figure 9 7 presents a typical display for the GPS Protocol Monitor The protocol monitor display for the GPS Protocol Link shows message time message direction transmitted or received and message type followed by the full text of the transmitted or received message in hexadecimal bytes NETWORK DIAGNOSTIC TOOL VERSION 1 10 N800306 0001 Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by ProvidedBY Union Switch amp Signal SERIAL MESSAGE MONITOR CPS Down ID Symbol Stop RUN TIME MONITOR GPS MASTER PC Date Wednesday April 30 2008 Time 14 56 36 XMT GPS Master 10 25 10 03 XMT GPS Master 10 25 10 03 XMT GPS Master 10 25 10 03 XMT GPS Master 10 25 10 03 MASTER HISTORICAL DATA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SET UP Serial Message Monitor 6 20 2005 4 41 PM Figure 9 7 Network Diagnostic Tool Serial Message Monitor 9 1 2 CLASSC EMP Protocol Link Specifications The CLASSC EMP protocol communication driver supports communication with a Microwave Data Systems entraNET 220 data radio to deliver signal aspect information via a wireless radio frequency link to equipped locomotives 9 1
193. efined from 0 0 to 30 0 volts e Target indication for any vital Object Controller application shall always be based on the current status of two proximity sensors inputs Example one on each rail e For vital applications it is recommended that the application should be written so that a mismatch of stable paired proximity sensor inputs 1 e one sensor input indicating and one sensor not indicating results in the application logic interpreting the instability as a failure of one or more of the connected sensors In this event the application logic will latch the condition to ensure a maintenance person is required to physically inspect the device s and make the needed repairs before normal operation is restored SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 3 39 E OC Configurations 7 AnsaldoSTS 3 2 2 Proximity Sensors The following guidelines must be used when using proximity sensors in an application e Target indication for any object controller application shall always be based on the current status of two proximity sensor inputs mismatch of stable paired proximity sensor inputs 1 one sensor input indicating and one sensor not indicating shall require the maintenance person to physically inspect the device s and make the needed repairs before normal operation is restored e The proximity sensors shall not be located more than 100 feet away from the object controller no matter what size of wire being used Table 3
194. ent numbers to aid in debugging Errors and warnings reported by the executive refer to statements by statement number 12 1 5 Application Image Identification Refer to Section 4 5 2 Application Image Identification in SM 6800D After the source listing the compiler presents enough information to correctly match the listing to the application This information consists of Target type Object Controller e Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC of application image as used by the Serial Diagnostic Tool Checksum that would be seen on Flash Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory EPROM programmer 12 1 6 Board Address Jumper Settings NOTE Jumper settings are preconfigured at the factory Refer to Section 4 5 2 1 I O Board Address Jumper Settings in SM 6800D Note that the wiring and I O board address jumper settings are dependent on the organization of the OC program s I O Section and that the settings are listed separately from the rest of the I O board information SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 12 5 29 Compiling an OC Application 7 AnsaldoSTS For each defined board the compiler lists e Board name as defined in the application Board type A text picture of switch positions drawn with 18 0 s characters where 1 represents the jumper shunt and 0 represents an open jumper is shown below Address Select Jumper Settings THESCC SCC 01234567 10000000 12 1 7 Unassigne
195. ernet Explorer m x SERIAL MESSAGE MONITOR CPS Down Home RUN TIME MONITOR Board Information Link Information Free Run Variable Display Serial Message Monitor HISTORICAL DATA User Data Log Event Log Error Log Event Error Code Look Up SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SET UP Set Clock Reset Unit Configuration STATUS XMT MSG TYPE NV Data SI STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS XMT MSG T STATUS S RCV MSG TYPE STATUS S N DMSN 3b RCVMSN 3 SRC AD DMSN 3c RCVMSN 3d SRC AD DMSN 3d RCVMSN 3c SRC AD XMT MSG T XMT MSG T M Data 5 DMSN 3d RCVMSN SRC AD TYPE XMT MSG TYPE XMT MSG TYPE RCV MSG TYPE MSG XMT MSG T MSG M XMT MSG TYI XMT MSG TYI XMT MSG T M XMT MSG TY RCV MSG TYPE Data 5 XMT MSG T M XMT MSG TYI RCV MSG TYPE Data 5 XMT MSG T M STATUS XMT MSG STATUS XMT MSG T M PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE STATUS XMT MSG TYPE PE STATUS S NV Data S STATUS S STATUS S V Data 8 STATUS S V Data 5 STATUS S V Data 5 STATUS S NV Data S STATUS S V Data 8 DMSN 3e RCVMSN 3f SRC AD DMSN 3f RCVMSN 40 SRC AD DMSN 40 RCVMSN 41 SRC AD DMSN 41 RCVMSN 40
196. esets Indicates a fault within the LED signal s or a problem with the FAULT Green wiring IN Indicates that the Non Vital Input is energized NV OUT Indicates that the Non Vital Output is energized Indicates that LED Signal Outputs No 1 through No 6 are energized A fault condition is indicated by three quick on pulses followed Yellow by a longer off period LED signal connections are at the upper board gray connector J2 on the rear of the unit Indicates that Vital Inputs No 1 through No 6 are energized Green Power connection is at the lower orange connector J3 on the rear of the unit Indicates that Vital Outputs No 1 through No 6 are energized Power connection is at the lower gray connector J4 on the rear of the unit CPS Red Indicates that the Conditional Power Supply is operational US amp S Logo Blue power indicator and is when power is applied to 3 20 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 OC Configurations 4 AnsaldoSTS TANVd MOVE YOLOANNOO O 9 9 OOOO OF 0000000000000000 4 XX ASH 1000105008 SUVMLIOS 3AI1n93X3 0000000000000000 lt asna vsi YSN NI
197. etected as faulty This is different from the MICROLOK II s 6 board in that the LAMP16 board s LIGHT OUT bit is set 1 state when its attached signal is detected to be faulty Replacing a faulty signal will be automatically detected and the faulty condition cleared in five seconds except in the condition of a faulty ON signal Table 3 17 Fault Clearing Logic OUTPUT STATE WHEN AFTER REPAIRING THE SIGNAL FAULT WAS CURRENT OUTPUT STATE SIGNAL THE FAULT WILL BE CLEARED BY 5 seconds setting and Retest LED board application bit L lI Retest LED board application bit Waiting 5 seconds or setting and clearing the Retest LED board application bit Waiting 5 seconds or setting and OFF OFF clearing the Retest LED board application bit By requiring the logic bit to be set we are preventing a signal that has failed in the ON state and tests good in the OFF state from being upgraded by the application logic This may be done by assigning the LED6 board s Non Vital input Application bit to the LED6 board s Retest Application bit Following AREMA guidelines a signal that is detected as faulty in the ON state will continue to be considered faulty in the OFF state This prevents an application from inadvertently flashing a signal when it downgrades a faulty ON signal To clear the fault condition for a signal detected as faulty while in the ON state the outpu
198. eue breaks before makes SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 11 3 Application Programming 7 AnsaldoSTS 11 5 Logic Processing An ASSIGN statement is equivalent to tracing the path or paths of current flow from a battery to the assigned relay coils Therefore the logic for all of the wiring associated with that relay coil must be contained in one ASSIGN statement The order of the ASSIGN statements in the source program will usually have no effect on the output An ASSIGN statement is re computed each time one of the relay coils included in the statement changes state This involves the following chain of events The system first determines if the coil has a timing delay If so the specified time is run until the relay is set or cleared Assignments for non timer coils are carried out immediately and all ASSIGN statements in which this coil is referenced are re computed This process continues until the system reaches a stable state During the time ASSIGN statements are being computed no output updates local or remote are performed inputs are still scanned at 50 millisecond rate Any output started before the logic sequence will continue to be processed However outputs cannot be updated To follow most relay logic design practices logic processing always uses a break before make format When a relay changes values the break is done before the make Equations are processed relay by relay with breaks executed before makes for
199. f delay Link Fail Timeout Message Type Message Version WIU Address Size Message Type Size Message Version Size Message Data Size Message Digest Size Master wait TO Data Address Status Address Health Address Local Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Data Port Status Port Health Port EMP Type Broadcast Change 60 000 H n Cn Cn Cn wo e cn C C en Cn Cn o o i 20 480 H Encrypted Key 0102 0304 0506 0708 1718 1920 2122 2324 3334 3536 3738 3940 4950 5152 5354 5556 09101112 1314 1516 2526 2728 2930 3132 4142 4344 4546 4748 5758 5960 6162 6364 EMP Source Address WiL oooocox wayside up com Reset Changes Apply Defaults Java Applet Window Figure 9 8 CLASSC EMP Protocol Link Configuration 9 12 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS GPS MASTER Specifications 9 1 2 5 2 CLASSC EMP Protocol Station Configuration In the main menu click on the link labeled System Configuration Select the appropriate link button to modify or view the configuration elements Select the CLASSC EMP protocol station to configure Figure 9 9 p
200. for a CODED IN6 board looks the same as the IN6 board BOARD TheCodedIn6 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 TYPE CODED IN6 INPUT IN6 1 6 2 IN6 3 6 4 IN6 5 IN6 6 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 Six additional system bits are created for this board type IN6 1 Flash IN6 2 Flash IN6 3 Flash IN6 4 Flash IN6 5 Flash and IN6 6 Flash 3 3 User Interface The Serial Communication Controller SCC PCB has four user programmable LEDs on the front of the OC and provides status LEDs for each of the two communications ports 3 48 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 77 AnsaldoSTS OC Configurations There is a power status LED on the front of the OC behind the US amp S logo A health status LED is on the front of the OC A CPS LED is also on the front of the OC The LEDs on the front panel of the OC provide a status of the condition of the unit The colors and functions of these LEDs are presented in Table 3 2 through Table 3 6 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 3 49 OC Configurations 7 AnsaldoSTS s 7 AnsaldoSTS 3 50 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Configure the to Communicate with the 4 CONFIGURE THE PC TO COMMUNICATE WITH THE OC 41 Minimum Requirements The PC must have an Ethernet port An Ethernet crossover cable is necessary for direct connection to the Object Controller or a standard Ethernet cable for connection to a network or a hub The Network Diagnostic Tool requires
201. from the OC e WebTool The Ethernet Port marked WebTool is for accessing the Diagnostic functions available on the OC When you connect to this Ethernet Port with Internet Explorer you can open up the Network Diagnostic Tool This accesses a program stored on it and provides a tool for accessing the Diagnostics features of the OC SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 5 1 29 Object Controller Configuration Setup AnsaldoSTS 5 3 Configuring the Object Controller Ethernet Ports three ports on the Object Controller are initially set to IP address 169 254 1 10 To use the Ethernet ports on the Object Controller the IP address of each port must be set to a unique value when used within a network Use the procedure in the following sections to perform this function NOTE If you do not know the IP address of a port the preferred method of obtaining it is to use the Digi Device Discovery tool See Section 6 5 4 Accessing the OC s Network Adapter To access the Network Adapter use Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the Ethernet Port For example the unit ships with an IP address of 169 254 1 10 In this case in the Internet Explorer browser address bar type http 169 254 1 10 It will prompt for a username password for the NA HTTP AWS Realm Table 5 1 lists the usernames and passwords to access the WebTool Table 5 1 Username Password for Net Adapter WebTool webtools 551 Normal usage u
202. g initialization Board Information Application CRC is C824 Executive CRC is Link Information 01 23 07 08 51 01 00 Free Run Variable Display 01 0008 13 071BA33140 C824 41 01 Snapshot complete Serial Message Monitor Application CRC is C824 Executive CRC is FHA DOE NEN 01 23 07 08 51 05 00 AM User Data Log 01 0007 01 071 87040 C824 F41A 4932 011 Event Log Log initialization Application CRC is C824 Error Log Executive CRC is 01 23 07 09 39 01 00 Event Error Code Look Up 01 0008 13 071BAB7140 C824 3F9B FBCE 01 Snapshot 9F9B complete Set Clock Application CRC is C824 Reset Unit Executive CRC is 01 23 07 09 39 05 00 AM SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SET UP Configuration User Data Log 1 24 2007 9 53 AM Fu Figure 10 11 User Data Log 10 5 2 System Event Log 10 5 2 1 Event Screen The System Event Log Figure 10 12 displays the most recent 5000 critical errors warnings or events saved in the System Event Log Any system critical error or warning is logged in the System Event Log Events are used to relay miscellaneous system information and may be limited by use of the configuration SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 10 11 Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool 77 AnsaldoSTS E NETWORK DIAGNOSTIC TOOL VERSION 1 1 N800306 0001 Microsoft Internet Explorer 10 5 2 2 Reload Button Home RUN TIME MONITOR Board Information
203. h and The term bit is used to represent a single application logic Boolean bit The user specified name consists of numbers and letters While a name may begin with a number it must contain at least one letter For example flash 1TK NWZ The term bit list is used to represent a list of Boolean bits Each bit name is separated by a comma The bit list may contain from one to the maximum allowable number of bits 4000 per program A term enclosed in brackets gt is meant to represent a special type of user defined bit 11 2 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 A 7 AnsaldoSTS Application Programming For example in the segment OBJECT CONTROLLER PROGRAM program the term program name gt follows the same rules as bit but the item also has a special meaning that being the program name name is a user supplied program value The valid values are explained near the definition ID names can contain letters or numerals They may start with a numeral but must contain at least one letter bit list 1 acomma separated list of valid id names that refer to Boolean bits variable list 1 comma separated list of valid id names that refer to numeric variables Brackets are used to enclose optional parts of program statements The brackets themselves are not part of the program Structures such as bill george indicate that either bill or george can be placed in
204. hat may arise with technical equipment in service Please consult an ASTS USA local sales representative in the event of any irregularities with our product ASTS USA expressly disclaims liability resulting from any improper handling or use of our equipment even if these instructions contain no specific indication in this respect We strongly recommend that only approved ASTS USA spare parts are used as replacements FCC Part 15 Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 CET appareil numerique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 Revision History 77 AnsaldoSTS Revision History DATE NATURE OF REVISION Incorporate ECO 140185 20 which corrected the connections in Figure 2 15 and 2 17 October
205. hin a timeout period then the connection to the Network Interface closes refer toFigure 10 18 This is done to ensure that an idle PC does not cause a denial of service so another PC can then connect to the Network Interface This timeout 360 seconds is specified in the Network Interface configuration file niacfg ini under option CLIENT_TIME_OUT To reconnect close the Network Diagnostic Tool and the Network Interface windows Then reconnect to the Network Interface window and relaunch the Network Diagnostic Tool A reset of the OC unit is required whenever configuration changes are made or when the unit has detected critical errors and gone into Shutdown Mode Figure 10 19 10 18 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 AnsaldoSTS Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool 3 NETWORK DIAGNOSTIC TOOL VERSION 1 1 N800306 0001 Microsoft Internet Explorer loj x HOME Shut Down Home Network Diagnostic Tool Version 1 1 800306 0001 IP Address 172 16 103 162 Board Information Executive Version 01 14 RUN TIME MONITOR Link Information Executive CRC FHA Free Run Variable Display Application CRC 86FA Serial Message Monitor Program Name s_down HISTORICAL Compiler Version 1 x User Data Log PC Date Wednesday January 24 2007 10 12 44 AM Event Log Error Log CONNECTED Event Error Code Look Up SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SET UP Set Clock Reset Unit Configuration 1 24 2007 10 11 AM Click to
206. hreshold 2 Event Threshold 3 Event Threshold 4 Event Threshold 5 Event Threshold 6 Event Threshold 7 Event Threshold 8 Event Threshold 9 Event Threshold 10 Event Threshold 1 1 Event Threshold 12 Event Threshold 13 Event Threshold 14 Event Threshold 15 Event Threshold 16 Event Threshold 17 Event Threshold 18 Event Threshold 19 Event Threshold 20 Event Threshold 21 Event Threshold 22 Event Threshold 23 Event Threshold 24 Event Threshold 25 Event Threshold 26 Event Threshold 27 Event Threshold 28 Event Threshold 29 Event Threshold 30 Event Threshold 31 Event Threshold 32 Event Threshold 33 Event Threshold 34 Event Threshold 35 Event Threshold 36 Event Threshold 37 Event Threshold 38 Event Threshold 39 Event Threshold 40 Event Threshold 41 Event Threshold 42 Event Threshold 43 Event Threshold 44 1 Fixed 1 Non vital Adjustable 1 Non vital Adjustable 1 Non vital Adjustable 1 Non vital Adjustable 1 Non vital Adjustable 1 Non vital Adjustable 1 Non vital Adjustable 1 Non vital Adjustable 1 Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adju
207. iguration Settings Each board that is identified in the application program must be properly configured for operation The OC system supports the operation of several types of I O boards These include the SCC MIX IN6 OUT6 IN6 and boards Click on one of the Board Configuration selection buttons on the system configuration selection screen A screen similar to Figure 10 23 appears 10 24 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool System Configuration US 1 System Configuration Vital Config General Enable Selective Shutdown 170 Vital Input Enable Analog Input 1 Enable Minimum Threshold Maximum Threshold Proximity Sensor 1 Enable Proximity Sensor 2 Enable Defaults Reset Changes Figure 10 23 Typical MIX I O Configuration Screen 10 6 3 4 Link Configurations The link configuration screen is shown in Figure 10 24 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 10 25 w Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool AnsaldoSTS System Configuration 3 MICROLOK Peer Link Enadle Point to Physical port 1 Baud rate 49200 Stop bi 1 Parity None v Key On delay eH Key Off delay eH Grant delay
208. imity Sensor 2 in an 2203 0101 indeterminate state Controller Mixed I O Board 5826 Proximity Sensor 1 a known good 2203 0101 Controller Mixed I O Board 5826 Proximity Sensor 2 a known good 2203 0101 Object Controller Mixed I O Board B3b Bad read for the Proximity Sensor 2203 9FB4 Bypass Circuitr Object Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Input B3d Input Bad 0000 0100 0000 0200 Object Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Input B3d Inout Unstable j i 0000 0400 0001 0300 0000 0100 0000 0200 Object Controller Mixed Board B2b Output B3d Output Flip Failure During Diagnostic Test Object Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Output B3d Output Failure During Verification Object Controller Mixed Board 5826 Output B3d Output Noisy During ___ 0300 Diagnostic Test Object Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Monitor B3d Output Voltage Reference ON Test Nois Object Controller Mixed Board B2b Output B3d Output Noisy During Verification Object Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Monitor B3d Output Voltage Reference OFF Test Failure Object Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Monitor B3d Output Voltage Reference ON Test Failure Object Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Monitor B3d Output Voltage Reference OFF Test Nois Object Controller Mixed I O Board B2b Invalid Proximity Sensor Diagnosti
209. ion circuit with smaller end to end delays a lower timeout can improve link performance when some slaves are not answering regularly due to intermittent communication problems Allowable values are 30 to 10 000 milliseconds The default value is 1100 milliseconds Allowable values are 0 to 100 milliseconds The default value is 0 INTERBYTE TIMEOUT milliseconds A setting of 0 selects 3 character times at the selected data rate DYNAMICS CODE Allowable values are 1 to 4 The default value is 4 The minimum signal required for the GPS receiver Allowable values 2 0 to 10 0 The default value is 2 0 The maximum position dilution of precision necessary to receive a MAXIMUM PDOP proper signal Allowable values are 4 0 to 30 0 The default value is 8 0 MASTER TIMEOUT SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 9 3 GPS MASTER Specifications AnsaldoSTS 9 1 1 3 GPS Master Protocol Link Configuration In the main menu click on the link labeled System Configuration Longin Select the appropriate link button to modify or view the configuration elements Figure 9 2 presents the configuration of the GPS Protocol Link System Configuration GPS MASTER GPS MASTER Link Enable Point to Point Physical port number Baud rate Stop bits Parity Key On delay Key Off delay Master wait TO Polling Interval Stale data TO
210. is now down However since RC has already picked and has a valid path through a stick circuit RC remains picked This flasher relay set up could not exist in actual relay logic but is possible with the OC by establishing a distinct pick up drop away interval for the relay The pertinent parts of the program include SET 1 SEC CLEAR 1 SEC ASSIGN NOT TI TO Tl Figure 11 5 If the timer value is not specified the contact will operate at a speed which cannot be detected by the run time system This would create an indeterminate function at this point inhibiting execution of the program ASSIGN NOT T1 TO T1 Figure 11 5 Conceptual Relay Model for Object Controller Programming A The double coil relay examples in Figure 11 6 are conceptual models that pertain to signal control slotting Models cannot apply to circuits with control contacts to both coils of a double coil relay The pertinent program statement for the model containing the CANCEL contact is 11 6 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Application Programming ASSIGN IN 1 AND NOT CANCEL TO IN 1 SERIAL INPUT CONTROL 5 CANCEL tse Figure 11 6 Conceptual Relay Model for Object Controller Programming B ASSIGN IN 1 AND NOT CANCEL IN 1 The capability to assign to serial inputs may be applied to the design of auto clearing controls In the case of auto clearing of requests if the input is a reques
211. justable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Logic Timeout 500 Vital Adjustable Configuration Compatibility 0 Fixed PC Vital Config Date 0 Vital Adjustable PC NV Config Date 0 Non vital Adjustable Front Vital Config Date 0 Vital Adjustable Front NV Config Date 0 Non vital Adjustable Password 0 Vital Adjustable SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 Sample Listing File 14 31 Sample Listing File 7 AnsaldoSTS Debug Port Address 1 Fixed Debug Port Baudrate 9600 Fixed Delay Reset 0 Fixed 14 3 GPS MASTER MIL PEER Example Program Application GPS PEER TEST compiled on Thu Apr 09 15 27 52 2009 CRC 67e2 Checksum c4d9 Page 1 dart 2 Object Controller Test Application 3 4 OBJECT_CONTROLLER Program GPS PEER TEST SITE ID STRING GPS LAB TEST DATE STAMP MARCH 4 2009 10 11 INTERFACE 12 13 LOCAL 14 15 BOARD THESCC 16 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 17 TYPE SCC 14 32 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Sample Listing File 18 19 BOARD THEMIXIO 20 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 21 TYPE MIXIO 22 23 OUTPUT BO 1 BO 2 BO 3 BO 4 24
212. l Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Logic Timeout 1000 Vital Adjustable Configuration Compatibility 0 Fixed PC Vital Config Date 0 Vital Adjustable PC NV Config Date 0 Non vital Adjustable Front Vital Config Date Front NV Config Date 0 Non vital Adjustable 0 Vital Adjustable Password 0 Vital Adjustable Debug Port Address 1 Non vital Adjustable Debug Port Baudrate 9600 Non vital Adjustable Delay Reset 0 Fixed 14 2 GPS MASTER CLASSC EMP Example Program Ay 77 AnsaldoSTS Application EXAMPLE compiled on Thu May 22 14 42 26 2008 CRC 3e02 Checksum 60ac Page 1 pardo 2 Object Controller Example Application 3 4 OBJECT CONTROLLER Program EXAMPLE DATE STAMP MARCH 07 2008 5 6 7 SITE ID STRING EXAMPLE PROGRAM 8 9 10 11 INTERFACE 14 16 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Sample Listing File 12 13 LOCAL 14 15 BOARD THESCC Define and enable 16 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 the serial 17 TYPE SCG communication 18 board 19 20 BOARD 6 6 1 21 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 22 IN6 OUT6 23 24 OUTPUT VO0 0 VO0 1 VO0 2 VO0 3 VO0 4 VO0 5 25 26 INPUT VI0 0 VI0 1 VIO 2 VIO 3 VIO 4 VIO 5 27 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 28 29 BOARD 6
213. l inodes 5070 Free inodes 5066 Name Type Size Date DEMO BASIC File 22166 Thu Jan 1 00 00 00 1970 Figure 7 4 Directory Screen 5 Follow the same procedure to upload other files to 6 When all files have been uploaded to RAMO on the Digi go back to the Advanced Tools page See Figure 7 1 NOTE Uploading the Executive Application from the PC to the Digi will not execute the files Uploading merely places the file s into the Digi s RAMO The MICROLOK UPLOAD button moves the file s from the Digi s RAMO to the processor where the file s will be executed 7 Click on the MLK Upload button See Figure 7 5 8 The progress bar shows the status of the upload SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 3 Uploading a MICROLOK OC Executive or Application AnsaldoSTS MICROLOK II Net Adapter Advanced Tools Network Settings Display network settings MLK Upload le Reboot Digi Upload Upload niacfz ini or Executive or Application directory List directory FLASHO directory List FLASHO directory Erase Erases the FLASH File System Opening page advanced 1 at 169 254 1 10 a a 4 4 Figure 7 5 Upload Progress Bar 9 Walt while the OC CPU is re flashed 10 When the process completes a status page See Figure 7 6 will give a summary of whether the process
214. least 1 second For an Input bit to be detected as a steady OFF input the signal must be cleared for at least 2 seconds If the Input bit has been cleared the Flash bit will also be cleared if it was set If the input is coding at an invalid code rate then a warning will be logged and both the Input bit and the associated Flash bit will be cleared if they are currently set The definition for a CODED MIXIO board looks the same as the MIXIO board BOARD TheCodedMIXIO ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 TYPE CODED MIXIO OUTPUT BO 1 BO 2 BO 3 BO 4 INPUT Cl 1 Cl 2 CI 3 4 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 NV ANALOG INPUT Al 1 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 ADJUSTABLE MINIMUM THRESHOLD 12 2 0 0 30 0 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 3 47 29 OC Configurations 7 AnsaldoSTS ADJUSTABLE MAXIMUM THRESHOLD 16 7 0 0 30 0 PROXIMITY SENSOR 1 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 PROXIMITY SENSOR 2 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 Four additional system bits are created for this board type CI 1 Flash CI 2 Flash CI 3 Flash and CI 4 Flash The definition for a CODED IN6 OUTS96 board looks the same as the IN6 OUT6 board BOARD TheCodedln6Out6 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 TYPE CODED IN6 OUT6 OUTPUT OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 INPUT IN 1 IN 2 IN 5 IN 6 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 Six additional system bits are created for this board type IN 1 Flash IN 2 Flash IN 3 Flash IN 4 Flash IN 5 Flash and IN 6 Flash The definition
215. low poner LEDs wiring is good Ethernet Port Turns ON at power up and turns OFF after approximately 1 minute when it Green LEDs resets IN 1 IN 2 IN3 IN 4 SPARE NA Not used in this application Turns ON when the analog voltage is within the range specified by the AN 1 Green application program This connection is at the upper board orange connector 41 on the rear of the unit Indicates that Vital Outputs No 1 through No 4 are energized Power connection is at the upper board gray connector J2 on the rear of the unit Indicates that Vital Inputs No 1 through No 4 are energized Power connection is at the upper board orange connector J1 on the rear of the unit Yellow When On steady indicates that the sensor is detecting metal When flashing indicates that the sensor is in an indeterminate state or there is a fault condition such as a bad sensor an open wire a short a sensor that is Yellow wired backward or an unconnected sensor When Off indicates that the sensor in not detecting metal This connection is at the upper board orange connector J1 on the rear of the unit Indicates that the Conditional Power Supply is operational supplying power to the vital outputs US amp S Logo This is the power indicator and is ON when power is applied to the unit 3 2 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011
216. m Lecce dani 10 11 10 5 2 System Event decedit i ebat e 10 11 10 5 9 System Error iie iie d va e di e tta ned e eaten 10 13 10 6 System Adjustment Setup U 10 14 10 6 1 Set OlIoCk i 10 14 10 6 2 Reset MICROLOK Object Controller U 10 15 10 6 3 System Configuration s 10 20 10 6 4 Event Error Code Help 10 27 10 7 Close Window Exit Application 10 28 11 APPLICATION PROGRAMMING u u u u u u u u u 11 1 11 1 Developing MICROLOK Object Controller 11 1 11 2 Programming Mechanics ai 11 2 11 3 Main Program 1 iieri EH Eee RU ee ee 11 3 11 4 Breaks Before Makes Rule 11 3 iv SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 w 7 AnsaldoSTS Table of Contents VA bei LOGIE 5 asnaspa 11 4 11 6 Comparison of Hardware and Software Relay 11 4 J17 QUEUING OPTIONS ya aq kawana
217. me RUN TIME MONITOR Board Information Link Information Free Run Variable Display Serial Message Monitor HISTORICAL DATA User Data Log Event Log Error Log Event Error Code Look Up SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SET UP Set Clock Reset Unit Configuration Figure 10 17 HOME Network Diagnostic Tool Version 1 1 N800306 0001 IP Address 172 16 103 162 Executive Version 01 14 Executive CRC FA Application CRC 2546 Program Name two_peer_comm Click to activate and use this control Compiler Version 1 1 Date Wednesday January 24 2007 10 00 02 CONNECTED CPS Up 1 24 2007 10 00 AM Typical Main Screen with Unit in CPS Up Mode SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 10 17 REMO gt Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool AnsaldoSTS EH HOME CPS Down Home Network Diagnostic Tool Version 1 1 N800306 0001 RUN TIME MONITOR IP Address 172 16 103 162 Executive Version 01 14 Executive CRC FMA Application 3819 Click to activate and use this control Program Name two_peer_comm Compiler Version 1 1 Date Wednesday January 24 2007 10 10 28 AM SERVER TIME OUT Please relaunch Network Diagnostic Error Code Look Ur SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SET UP Set Clock DISCONNECTED FROM THE SERVE 1 24 2007 10 10 Figure 10 18 Time Window If there is no network communication wit
218. n 9 7 3 Upad Progress Bab u s akta apayka Ses 7 4 Upload Status yur abe n e i skua 7 4 Erases Flash Function Password Dialog 8 8 Erase Flash Function Confirmation Page 8 9 Acutime Gold Connector um er iter em 9 2 GPS Protocol iiit rct tri rente eoe rer 9 4 Link Information 9 5 Network Diagnostic Tool Link Information 1 3 00000 0 9 6 Network Diagnostic Tool Link Information 2 of 9 6 Network Diagnostic Tool Link Information of 3 9 7 Network Diagnostic Tool Serial Message 9 8 CLASSC EMP Protocol Link 9 12 CLASSC EMP Station Configuration U 9 13 Link Information CLASSC EMP nennen nnns tenente nn 9 14 Network Diagnostic Tool Serial Message 9 15 Java Version Verification Dialog Box U 10 1 Java Open Splash sse ene
219. n parameters belonging to it e Entries for all boards show the state of the enable as defined in the application as well as its fixed or adjustable status 12 1 11 COMM Link Summary Refer to Section 4 5 10 COMM Link Summary in SM 6800D Note this information e COMM Links are summarized by link name and protocol as well as the state of any configuration parameters belonging to it e Entries for all links show the state of the enable as defined in the application as well as its fixed or adjustable status Also the enabled state of each of the stations on the link is displayed 12 1 12 System Level Configurable Parameters Refer to Section 4 5 11 System Level Configurable Parameters in SM 6800D Note that the compiler lists the state of all of the system level configuration parameters and if they are adjustable 12 1 13 Compiler Checks Refer to Section 4 6 Compiler Checks in SM 6800D Note that in the course of processing the source file the compiler can generate errors warnings and severe warnings Errors are generated in response to source code that cannot be interpreted by the compiler as a meaningful program Warnings are generated for inputs that may cause safe but unusable behavior Severe warnings are generated when the user input can be interpreted as a usable program but the compiler makes corrections to the source code Severe warnings are intended to notify the programmer of what corrections the
220. n Tue Sep 12 15 34 39 2006 by Object Controller Compiler Version 1 00 N800302 0001 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 14 7 Sample Listing File Application Image Summary Target Object Controller Application Image CRC 8bde Application Image Checksum 8298 Agdress Select Jumper Settings THESCC SCC 01234567 10000000 THEIN6OUTE6 IN6 OUT6 01234567 01000000 THEMIXIO MIXIO 01234567 00100000 Unassigned User Defined Output Bits None Found Unused User Defined Input Bits 121 MII 10 20 Bl1 INPUT BIT 122 MII 10 20 BI2 INPUT BIT 123 MII 10 20 BI3 INPUT BIT 124 10 20 14 INPUT BIT 135 20 10 1 INPUT BIT 136 MII 20 10 BI2 INPUT BIT 137 MII 20 10 BI3 INPUT BIT 138 20 10 14 INPUT BIT Unused or Unassigned Internal Bits AN 77 AnsaldoSTS 139 INTERNAL BIT UNUSED 140 b INTERNAL BIT UNUSED UNASSIGNED 141c INTERNAL BIT UNUSED 142 d INTERNAL BIT UNUSED 143e INTERNAL BIT UNUSED 144 f INTERNAL BIT UNUSED 145 g INTERNAL BIT UNUSED 14 8 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 AnsaldoSTS Sample Listing File 146 h INTERNAL BIT UNUSED UNASSIGNED 147i INTERNAL BIT UNUSED Bit Usage Summary CONTACT TIMES USED TYPE AS A TRIGGER BITI NAME FRONT BACK BLOCK TABLE CODE ASGNS TARG VITALITY 1 RESET 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 2 QUICK RESET 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 3 KILL 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM VITAL OUT 4CPS ENABL
221. n is at the upper board orange connector J1 on IN4 the rear of the unit SPARE NA Not used in this application Turns ON when the analog voltage is within the range specified AN 1 Green by the application program This connection is at the upper board orange connector J1 on the rear of the unit Indicates that Vital Outputs No 1 through No 4 are energized Power connection is at the upper board gray connector J2 on the rear of the unit When On steady indicates that the sensor is detecting metal When flashing indicates that the sensor is in an indeterminate state or there is a fault condition such as a bad sensor an PRX 1 open wire a short a sensor that is wired backward or an PRX 2 unconnected sensor When Off indicates that the sensor in not detecting metal This connection is at the upper board orange connector J1 on the rear of the unit IN5 IN 6 Indicates that Vital Inputs No 5 through No 8 are energized IN 7 Green Power connection is at the lower board orange connector J3 on IN8 the rear of the unit SPARE NA Not used in this application Turns ON when the analog voltage is within the range specified 2 Green by the application program This connection is at the lower board orange connector J3 on the rear of the unit Indicates that Vital Outputs No 5 through No 8 are energized Yellow Power connection is at the lower board gray connector J4 on the rear of the unit SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011
222. nchecked and skip Steps 5 and 6 If the box is checked proceed with Steps 5 and 6 4 4 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 AnsaldoSTS Configure the to Communicate with the Local Area Network LAN Settings Automatic configuration Automatic configuration may override manual settings To ensure the use of manual settings disable automatic configuration _ automatic configuration script Proxy server iv Use a proxy server for your LAN These settings will not apply to dial up or VPN connections V Bypass proxy server for local addresses Figure 4 6 LAN Settings Pop Up Box 5 Click on the Advanced button to open the Proxy Settings pop up box 6 In the Proxy Settings pop up Figure 4 7 type 169 254 in the Exceptions text box SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 4 5 w Configure the to Communicate with the AnsaldoSTS Proxy Settings Servers Proxy address to use www proxy switch com use the same proxy server for all protocols Exceptions Do use proxy server for addresses beginning with 169 254 aie Use semicolons to separate entries Figure 4 7 Proxy Settings Pop Up Box 7 Click OK on all open pop up boxes to close them 8 Re start IE for the changes to take effect Internet Explorer is now ready to access the OC 4 3 Apply Power to the Object Controller In the event the OC blue power LED
223. nfig Home Enter the 16 hex digit code example is 8103 0194 0533 0002 RUN TIME MONITOR Board Information Hex Code Link Information Free Run Variable Display Serial Message Monitor HISTORICAL DATA Get Help User Data Log Event Log Error Log Event Error Code Look Up SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SET UP Set Clock Reset Unit Configuration Event Error Look Up 1 24 2007 10 16 AM E Figure 10 25 Network Diagnostic Tool Event Error Code Help Screen This view is used to help the user determine what an event or error code actually means in plain English The user interface is a dialog style entry box into which the 16 digit hex code is entered The code is entered four digits at a time as presented in the Codes column in the Event or Error Logs Each edit box can hold four hex digits There are four edit boxes therefore 4 x 4 16 total hex digits Remember valid hex digits are 0 through 9 A B C D E and F Anything else is illegal Once the digits are entered the user presses the Get Help button and help is retrieved if it exists for the code entered See Figure 10 26 Entries into this screen are presently case sensitive Ensure that uppercase letters in error codes are entered as such into this screen SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 10 27 N Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool AnsaldoSTS NOTE The user may enter a valid 16 digit hex code but receive unknown help text This is because the help file has not been
224. nfiguration Setup 77 AnsaldoSTS FLASHO Directory Total blocks 1845 Free blocks 488 Block size 512 Total inodes 1584 Name _ Se mlevents_ dat File 161206 Thu Jan 1 00 00 00 1970 ndt htm File 762 Thu Jan 1 00 00 00 1970 jar File 384930 Thu Jan 1 00 00 00 1970 niacfg ini File 704 Thu Jan 1 00 00 00 1970 symbolTable mle File 2326 Thu Jan 1 00 00 00 1970 Figure 5 12 Directory The new settings won t take effect until the Ethernet port has been rebooted To do this click on the Reboot Digi button See Figure 5 9 The Ethernet port will take approximately one minute to reboot During boot the green LED on the Digi will light After the Ethernet port has been reset the green LED on the Digi will go out and the yellow LED will light steady The port now has the new IP settings 5 7 Network Adapter Advanced Options 5 7 1 PEER Routing Statistics This shows statistics between the Digi and the OC Serial data for the PEER Routing When everything is well the only statistics should be Messages read from COM When the BIT_RATE the baud is set wrong other statistics get accumulated 5 16 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 AnsaldoSTS Object Controller Configuration Setup 5 8 Problems with the Digi 5 8 1 Uploading New Digi Firmware CAUTION There is no way to recover if the Firmware is corrupte
225. ngs Ensure that the Internet Explorer s Proxy setting allows for accessing the 169 254 address range To check Internet Explorer and to configure it if necessary do the following 1 In the Internet Explorer Tools option click on Internet Options See Figure 4 4 Bunion Switch amp Sign File Edit View Favorites Tool Bak J x iz Mailand News S L gt Pop up Blocker Synchronize ANSALDO SIGNAL r pir UNION SWITCH amp SIGNAL INC IS A LEADER IN THE DESIGN MANUFACTURE AND SERVICE OF SIGNALING AUTOMATION AND Figure 4 4 Tools Drop Down Menu 2 In the Internet Options pop up box click on the Connections tab See Figure 4 5 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 4 3 Configure the PC to Communicate with the 7 AnsaldoSTS Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced 9 set up Internet connection click Setup Setup Choose Settings if you need to configure a proxy server for a connection Local Area Network LAN settings LAN Settings not apply to dial up connections Choose AN Settings Settings above for dial up settings Figure 4 5 Connections Tab the Internet Options Box 3 In the Connections tab click on the LAN Settings button 4 The LAN Settings pop up box will open Figure 4 6 If the Use a proxy server for your LAN is unchecked leave it u
226. nnections from the Object Controller are not guaranteed and are dependent on addressing schemes example 4001 192 168 1 12 60012000C 6001 192 168 1 11 40012000D local port is the Listening port and remote port is the port used for outbound connections 8 3 5 HMAC Options or hash keyed message authentication code provides a way to check the integrity of data sent through the communication links HMAC provides integrity checking based on message authentication codes MAC MACS are used between two parties that share a secret key so that the information transmitted between these two parties can be validated HMAC adds a message authentication protocol on top of the PEER protocol A Key Server is required for this function to work When HMAC is enabled all messages are sent encapsulated with the HMAC protocol Entries in this section are specified as 0 O HMAC disabled 1 HMAC enabled SERVER 0 0 0 0 HMAC Key Server IP address PORT 5840 HMAC Key Server IP port KEY TIMEOUT 2000 Time in seconds between HMAC Key heartbeat messages KEY RETRYS 3 Number of missed heartbeats before key is declared invalid 8 4 Erasing the Existing Configuration File If the file system on the Object Controller is not working you may wish to completely erase the configuration file niacfg ini from the embedded file system using the following procedure 1 Make sure you have a known good or factory default settings configur
227. nt address spaces or address classes There is a limit of two I O boards that can be defined in any address class except for the SCC board only one can be defined and it must be defined first and the LED6 board only one board can be defined because of physical limitations to the package size The compiler assigns addresses by class in the order of definition of the board The relationship between board type and address class is listed in Table 16 1 Valid Peripheral Address VPA For every I O board defined the compiler creates two bits based on the board s name These are SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 15 3 Examining an Application Program 7 AnsaldoSTS lt board name gt ENABLED Read only lt board name gt SELECTIVE SHUTDOWN The board name gt ENABLED bit indicates to the application if board has been enabled in the configuration The lt board name gt SELECTIVE SHUTDOWN bit is not supported at this time Table 15 1 PCB Board Type 5 IN6 OUT6 lN6 LED6 15 2 4 The Interface Section LOCAL Sub Section 15 2 4 4 Defining Board Type SCC Example board definition Address Class 16 Bit VPA A definition of this type of board looks like BOARD USER NAME ADJUSTABLEIFIXED ENABLE lt FLAG gt TYPE SCC Notes e There are no inputs or outputs associated with this board e Every application must contain an SCC board and it must be defined first in the LOCAL sub sec
228. oad the niacfg ini file tains the new settings to FLASHO make the new settings take effect after uploading the niacfg ini file you must select Reboot Digi from the Advanced page To upload a new Executive or Application upload the file to RAMO Then from the Advanced or main page select MLK Upload The page will load while the file 15 being uploaded This can take as long as 20 minutes When the upload process completes a status page will show the results 21 Done 4 intranet Figure 5 10 Upload Link Click on the Upload button File upload progress is indicated by the bar shown in Figure 5 11 This will update the configuration file on the Ethernet port 5 14 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Object Controller Configuration Setup MICROLOK II Net Adapter Advanced Tools Network Settings Display network settings MLK Upload Reboot Digi Upload Upload niacfg ini or Executive or Application directory List RAMO directory FLASHO directory List FLASHO directory Erase Erases the FLASH File System Opening page advanced_1 at 169 254 1 10 Figure 5 11 File Upload Progress Bar When it is finished it will go to a file listing page See Figure 5 12 Click the Back button twice to go back to the Advanced Tools page SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 5 15 Object Controller Co
229. ogram information See Figure 10 4 This indicates a PC Link is established NETWORK DIAGNOSTIC TOOL VERSION 1 30 N800306 0001 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 xj File Edit Favorites Tools Help i A A 3 gt x 2 D 2 Search Favorites 3 Address http 169 254 1 10 F5 FLASHO ndt htm z Links gt sos RUN TIME MONITOR Network Diagnostic Tool Version 1 3B Prototype N IP Address 169 254 1 10 Executive Version 01 30 Board Information Link Information Executive CRC 4C6C Free Run Variable Display Application CRC CA02 Serial Message Monitor Program Name DEMO basic HISTORICAL DATA PC Date Thursday September 11 2008 12 47 05 PM User Data Log Event Log Error Log Event Error Code Look Up CONNECTED SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SET UP Set Clock Reset Unit Configuration home 9 1 2008 8 11 PM Applet started el 1 Local intranet Figure 10 4 Network Diagnostic Tool System Main Menu SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 10 3 7 Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool AnsaldoSTS 10 4 Run Time Monitor 10 4 1 Board Information The Board Information Display Figure 10 5 presents the status information about I O boards that are enabled I O Boards are defined in the application logic They may also be Enabled Disabled during the configuration process if the I O boards
230. olean Logic Section of the program does not execute in the same manner as a typical computer program An OC program only executes those ASSIGN NV ASSIGN statements that need to be re evaluated based on changes The OC maintains a special data structure called a Logic Evaluation List which holds a list of assignment statements that must be re evaluated based on changes For example whenever an input in the system changes the executive software will mark all equations that use that input bit These equations are marked by placing them on the trigger list When the equations are executed they are removed from the trigger list By supporting this data structure only those portions of the program that must be re evaluated will be processed The Logic Evaluation List is actually divided into two separate lists Since relay logic follows a break before make rule the Logic Evaluation Lists are divided into BREAK and MAKE lists NV ASSIGN statements are executed in the same manner as the vital ASSIGN statement and at the same priority SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 11 13 Application Programming 7 AnsaldoSTS A vital assign statement has more checks than a non vital assign On complex equations NV ASSIGN statements will run faster In normal operation the timing difference is negligible A maximum of 499 statements can be awaiting execution at any time on each of the execution queues for ASSIGN and NV ASSIGN statements If an
231. on undoes all the current changes so all values revert to those existing when the configuration screen was first accessed System Configuration General System Configuration Last PC Vital Config 06 20 05 12 36 32 PM Last PC Non Vital Config none Last Panel Vital Config none Last Panel Non Vital Config none Event Class Logging Threshoids Event 1 Event 2 Event 3 Event 4 Event 5 Timing Logic Time out Delay Reset PC Configuration Debug Port Address 255 Debug Port Speed 9600 v Password Set Done Apply Defaults Reset Changes Java Applet Window Figure 10 22 General System Configuration SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 10 23 Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool AnsaldoSTS NOTE The Reset Changes option differs from Apply Defaults because the values set before the most recent changes were not necessarily the default values When all of the general system configuration parameters have been set to the proper values for the application click on the Done button at the lower left corner of the screen Another dialog box appears It displays that a value was changed and shows the previous value Click on the Yes button to save the configuration changes and complete the configuration for the general system settings The system configuration selection display is again displayed on the screen 10 6 3 3 Board Conf
232. on vital Adjustable No Response Timeout 1000 Non vital Adjustable Wayside Data Address 0 Fixed Status Address 0 Fixed Health Address 0 Fixed Local Address 0 Fixed EMP Source Address 0 Non vital Adjustable Link Fail Timeout 60000 Non vital Adjustable Message Type 1 Vital Adjustable Message Version 1 Vital Adjustable Interbyte Timeout 0 msec Non vital Adjustable WIU Adadress Size 24 Vital Adjustable Message Type Size 6 Vital Adjustable Message Version Size 4 Vital Adjustable Message Digest Size 32 Vital Adjustable Message Data Size 64 Vital Adjustable Application EXAMPLE compiled on Thu May 22 14 42 26 2008 CRC 3e02 60ac Page 13 Encrypted Key 0 Vital Adjustable Secret Key 0 Vital Adjustable Subnet Mask 0 Fixed Gateway Mask 0 Non vital Adjustable Data Port 4000 Non vital Adjustable Status Port 0 Non vital Adjustable Health Port 0 Non vital Adjustable EMP Type 20480 Non vital Adjustable Broadcast Change 1 Non vital Adjustable CLASSC EMP MP 88 0 Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable CLASSC EMP MP 88 0 Station Address 1 Vital Adjustable CLASSC EMP MP 88 0 BROADCAST INTERVAL 1000 Vital Adjustable CLASSC EMP MP 88 0 TEST INTERVAL 0 Vital Adjustable CLASSC EMP MP 88 0 RADIO CONFIG STRING 0 Non vital Adjustable CLASSC EMP MP 88 1 Enabled 1 Vital Adjustable CLASSC EMP MP 88 1 Station Address 2 Vital Adjustable CLASSC
233. ore signals are shorted together the system will not indicate an error if all of the signals are in the same state all on or all off If a wiring short causes an off state signal to turn on then a critical error will occur and the OC system will reset 3 2 3 1 Signal and Protection Board Wiring The following is a list of wiring specific requirements notes for the ASTS USA LED Signal System SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 3 43 29 OC Configurations 7 AnsaldoSTS e Users must not connect additional loads such as local indicators across the signal leads of the LED signal e Fuses are not needed recommended on the signal outputs the ASTS USA constant current regulator output includes short circuit protection and no damage will occur to the system if an output is inadvertently shorted to ground Fuses are built into the OC on both battery inputs 10 amp on the system power supply input and 15 amp on the LED6 battery input See Figure 3 1 through Figure 3 13 for fuse locations 3 2 3 2 LED6 Board Table 3 16 summarizes the expected measurements that can be observed on the LED6 Board that is functioning properly with a good LED Signal load These measurements are taken with a meter at the signal output or with the OC Network Diagnostic Tool Any readings outside of the stated ranges indicate a possible faulty system module Table 3 16 Valid LED6 Vital Output Readings Voltage between 29V and 48V ON Current 350 ma
234. ork Diagnostic Tool WebTool AnsaldoSTS 10 6 3 1 2 System Configuration Overview Configured PCBs and links appear on the main screen If they appear grayed out they are currently disabled The configuration tool provides a wide variety of options for checking and modifying the configuration of the OC system hardware and software Three types of options are provided within this tool e System Configuration options enable the user to modify the general system parameter e Board Configuration options enable the user to enable disable and configure the individual OC system printed circuit boards e Link configuration options enable the user to configure the OC system communication links 10 6 3 2 General System Settings Displays system configuration and event settings Click on the General selection button on the system configuration selection display Check adjust the general system settings on the screen shown in Figure 10 22 The top four fields in this display show the dates on which the system vital and non vital configuration settings were last modified Entries are included for configurations done using the Network Diagnostic Tool program The user cannot modify these fields The Event Class Logging Threshold fields are used to manage the amount of information placed in the event buffer during system operation Each event listed on this display is a system event predefined in the OC executive software The setting indicated for
235. r nnne nens 10 2 Network Diagnostic Tool Connection 10 2 Network Diagnostic Tool System Main Menu a 10 3 Board Information 10 4 Link Information Display uu uy uba 10 5 Glear Link StatistiS 10 6 Free Run Variable Display I rennen enne 10 6 Filtered Free Run Variable 10 8 Serial Message Monitor l l s s 10 10 User Data u au e Be 10 11 System Event u y Ede teen anadi sisa 10 12 Help Button 10 13 Figure 10 13 viii SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 77 AnsaldoSTS Figure 10 14 Figure 10 15 Figure 10 16 Figure 10 17 Figure 10 18 Figure 10 19 Figure 10 20 Figure 10 21 Figure 10 22 Figure 10 23 Figure 10 24 Figure 10 25 Figure 10 26 Figure 10 27 Figure 11 1 Figure 11 2 Figure 11 3 Figure 11 4 Figure 11 5 Figure 11 6 Figure 11 7 Figure 11 8 Figure 11 9 Figure 11 10 Figure 11 11 Figure 11 12 Figure 12 1 Figure 12 2 Figure 12 3 Figure 12 4 Figure 15 1 Table of Contents SVSTSIMIEM OG LOG es ut SSS t L umu ma Suma 10 14 Set Time of Day Clock Display
236. re listed in Table 11 3 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 11 9 A Application Programming 7 AnsaldoSTS Table 11 2 Compilier Defined System Bits APPLICATION ACCESS TO BIT RESET Read Write Resets system QUICK RESET Read Write QUICK RESET can be the object of an application logic equation If this bit ever becomes true the system resets ignoring any reset delay defined in configuration KILL Read Write Kills Critical Power Supply CPS CPS ENABLE Read Write Enables CPS if set during initial logic processing CPS STATUS Indicates CPS is up SYSTEM BIT NAME BIT FUNCTION CONFIGURE ERROR Read EEPROM Configuration was Invalid This bit will be set any time you upload software because the old and new CRCs will be different After uploading software you must go through a system configuration even if you do not change anything As you do so the new CRC will be loaded into the EEPROM and the CONFIGURE ERROR bit will clear LOG LARGE User bit log is gt 75 full LOG FULL User bit log is full and being overwritten CLOCK FREEZE Read Write Set to make the clock numerics update to current value and stop changing CLOCK SET Read Write Setting this bit will cause the time of day clock to be updated from the values in the clock numerics LED n Read Write Non Vital outputs displayed on Front Panel CPU LEDs The value of nis between 1 and 4 LOG OK Data in user log is valid when bit is set 11 10 SM 9494 Rev
237. resent in their messages For an example refer to the Example Application Program and Listing File 15 2 6 Timing Attributes Refer to Section 3 8 Timing Attributes in SM 6800D Note the following information about timing attributes Adjustable timers are not supported e Timing characteristics such as a slow pick and or a slow drop delay are added to previously defined Boolean bits in the Timer Bits section SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 15 11 200 Application Program AnsaldoSTS e These characteristics can be added to any bit defined in the Boolean section or any output bit They may not be added to any system bit or input bit e Because of shared timing resources there is a combined limit of 399 timers tables and numeric blocks that may be defined The section to define them consists of one or more Timer Bit Lists Note this example TIMER BITS lt Timer Bit Lists gt 15 2 6 1 Timer Bit Lists Refer to Section 3 8 1 Timer Bit Lists in SM 6800D Note the following information about timer bit lists e A Timer Bit List is a lt bit list gt with at least one bit followed by the timing characteristics for those bits e Timing characteristics are SET or CLEAR times specified as a value with units Note this example lt bit list gt SET lt time value gt lt unit gt CLEAR lt time value gt lt unit gt The SET and CLEAR portions must be included and can specify
238. resents the CLASSC EMP Protocol Station configuration CLASSC EMP Protocol station configuration parameters are described in Section 9 1 2 4 of this manual Syztem Configuration EMP Station Station Enable WIU Channel Address 1 Broadcast Interval 1 000 Test Interval 60 000 Radio Config String 01020304 05 Done Apply Defaults Reset Changes Java Applet Window Figure 9 9 CLASSC EMP Station Configuration 9 1 2 5 3 CLASSC EMP Protocol Link Statistics In the main menu click on the button labeled Link Information This will bring up a menu that will allow the user to view statistical information for both boards and protocol links To enter the Link Information view for a particular link simply click on the appropriate button Figure 9 10 presents the CLASSC EMP Protocol Link Statistics Display SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 9 13 GPS MASTER Specifications NETWORK DIAGNOSTIC TOOL VERSION 1 3B Prototype N800306 0001 Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by ProvidedBY Union Switch lome RUN TIME MONITOR 3oard Information Free Run Variable Display Serial Message Monitor HISTORICAL DATA User Data Log Event Error Code Look U SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SET UP Set Clock Reset Unit Link Information LINK INFORMATION Link Name CLASSC_EMP Link Type CLASSC EMP otal messages sent 8010 Data messages sent 8010 Check data message count 0 Good
239. riate version of the Java Click to continue to open Java If the Java version 1s correct the Java application launches See Figure 10 2 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 10 1 ie d w Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool 7 AnsaldoSTS A network DIAGNOSTIC TOOL VERSION 1 30 800206 0001 Microsoft Internet Explorer ________________ 21815 Figure 10 2 Open Splash Screen The Network Diagnostic toll opens and begins to establish communications with the OC See Figure 10 3 Home RUN TIME MONITOR Board Information Link Information Free Run Variable Display Serial Message Monitor HISTORICAL DATA User Data Log lt lt lt lt lt lt Pleas gt gt gt gt gt gt Event Log Error Log up Event Error Code Look Up SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SET UP Set Clock Reset Unit Configuration Home Figure 10 3 Network Diagnostic Tool Connection Screen Once connected the Network Diagnostic Toll Main Menu appears See Figure 10 4 10 2 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 AnsaldoSTS Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool 10 3 Main Menu NOTE If you can not determine the version of the Executive Software being used on the OC use the Network Diagnostic Tool to verify the version being used This menu displays tools available for maintaining the OC Ensure that the Program Name is showing the anticipated pr
240. ropriate sting message Event Warning Error Fields and bits in Error Code shown in the table as 2 indicate fields bits that that are meaningless to the error These fields bits have no bearing on the error and can be any value 16 6 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 AnsaldoSTS Optional Parts List 17 OPTIONAL PARTS LIST The optional parts list for the OC is shown in Table 17 1 Table 17 1 Optional Parts List Lightning Arrestor Low Voltage Blue Primary lightning protection for input and outputs 14513920101 Lightning Arrester High Voltage Red Primary lighting protection for inputs and outputs 14513320201 Proximity Sensor 5 mm sensing distance J7381040009 Proximity 10 mm sensing distance J7381040031 Proximity Sensor 10 mm sensing distance with detachable cable 47381040033 Proximity Sensor 15 mm sensing distance J7381040032 Proximity 20 mm sensing distance J7381040030 Proximity Sensor 20 mm sensing distance with detachable cable 9981040029 MOV 24 Volt Part Number V24ZA50 Connect across each WAGO insertion tool Part Number 210 120 Used to insert and remove wires from connectors J0390000159 Connector 16 pole gray for I O Connector 16 pole orange for 1 0 ASTS USA LED Signal Protection Board part of signal assembly N46205001 ASTS USA LED Signal Assembly Green cyan 6 3 8 For use with Object Controller Part Number
241. rtoSend Transmit Clock 3 2 Specifications Electrical and environmental specifications for the OC are shown in Table 3 12 3 38 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS OC Configurations Table 3 12 Functional Specifications PARAMETER VALUE GENISYS MICROLOK PEER ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS Input Power 12VDC 9 8 to 16 2VDC Current Draw 2 inputs and 2 outputs ON 1 8 Amps Output 12 14VDC Output Load 200 ohms per discrete output Minimum Resistance 200 ohms per bi polar pair Maximum number of Outputs Turned 6 with 200 ohm loads On at the Same Time Input Impedance 2000 ohms per discrete input 2000 ohms per bi polar input ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS Class B environment 2000VAC rms at for 1 minute channel to channel 3 2 1 MIX I O Board Specifications The MIX I O Board was designed to be a part of the Moveable Bridge Monitoring package which is intended to detect the proper alignment of a moveable bridge and indicate when the bridge is properly positioned Using a proximity sensor mounted to the rails the OC can detect if the rails and bridge are in the proper position and provide a vital indication The Bridge Monitor package also includes an analog input for battery monitoring Table 3 13 presents the specifications for the analog input and the proximity sensors Notes e Threshold levels for the analog inputs are defined in tenths of a volt and range is d
242. ruary 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Examining an Application Program 15 EXAMINING AN APPLICATION PROGRAM NOTE The user MUST be familiar with the MICROLOK II syntax contained in the MICROLOK II set of Service Manuals SM 6800 This section covers the differences between the OC and the standard MICROLOK II system 15 1 Scope of Section This section will review a typical MICROLOK Object Controller application structure NOTE The OC is a vital system and is designed as a safety critical system The section is comprised of these topics Application Programming Getting Started e The Interface Section e Data Definitions Boolean Bits e Timing Attributes e Constant Definitions e The Unit Configuration Section e The Logic Begin Section e Program Processing Order 15 1 1 Reference Material SM 6800D the MICROLOK System Application Logic Programming Guide published by ASTS USA SM 6800K MICROLOK Network Protocol and Networking Hardware published by ASTS USA SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 15 1 Examining Application Program 5 77 AnsaldoSTS OBJECT_CONTROLLER PROGRAM lt gt INTERFACE lt interface definitions gt BOOLEAN BITS lt bit list gt NV BOOLEAN BITS bit list gt NUMERIC VARIABLES variable list gt NV NUMERIC VARIABLES lt variable list gt ATTRIBUTES lt numeric attribute lists gt TIMER BITS lt Timer Bit
243. s 9 11 Logical Operator Symbols sse eene enne nnne 11 8 Compilier Defined System Bits l naa 11 10 Compilier Defined Time of Day 11 11 Reserved Words ana didi aa die 11 12 Application File Default Address and 5 12 4 euet ce riii uar tuii e rc Peta e 15 4 Timer Bit Rangas E e P Uer Ete ed fera e 15 12 Compiler Defined System 15 14 C 16 1 Optional cs DS m 17 1 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 4 AnsaldoSTS Introduction 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 Overview TheASTS USA MICROLOK Object Controller OC Figure 1 1 and Figure 1 2 is a low cost compact programmable microprocessor device used for vital or non vital control and indication of wayside devices such as switches signals or other equipment It is a vital remote I O device with programmable capabilities based on the ASTS USA MICROLOK technology The OC is packaged in a small footprint without losing its environmental integrity The processor requirements mimic the vital MICROLOK II processing platform including the common ASTS USA MICROLOK II protocols The OC interfaces to the signal system via I O wiring a WebTool port for diagnostics and two COM ports
244. s N17700101 N17700102 and N17700103 only For use with Object Controller Part Number N177001 19 only SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 17 1 Optional Parts List Z AnsaldoSTS s 7 AnsaldoSTS 17 2 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Technical Support 18 TECHNICAL SUPPORT The Rapid Action Information Link Team RAIL Team is a group of experienced product and application engineers ready to assist you to resolve any technical issues concerning this product Contact the RAIL Team in the United States at 1 800 652 7276 or by e mail at railteam ansaldo sts us 1 800 652 7276 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 18 1 Technical Support Z AnsaldoSTS 5 AnsaldoSTS End of Manual 18 2 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011
245. s this application data to control the interlocking This section will provide an overview of basic OC application programming mechanics techniques concepts and rules NOTE OC application program written using MICROLOK II rules Program is compiled with OC compiler Compiler creates mlp mll and m12 files 11 1 Developing a Object Controller Application The general process for developing and implementing OC application is shown in Figure 11 1 TEXT EDITOR APPLICATION SOURCE FILE LOGIC COMPILER APPLICATION FILE SYSTEM AND LISTING DEVELOPMENT APPLICATION SYSTEM PROGRAM DESIGN CPU FLASH EPROM Figure 11 1 Development System Block Diagram An application engineer reviews the planned OC application and identifies specific system requirements such as the OC circuit boards to be used system interconnects vital and non vital requirements and all required interlocking logic SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 11 1 Application Programming 7 AnsaldoSTS The OC system programmer creates a unique application source file based on the system requirements specified by the application engineer The programmer uses a standard text editor to create the source file The source file must be saved as a text file to be usable by the compiler However the text file can be saved with an ML2 extension to identify it as an OC application The
246. saldoSTS OC Configurations AVY HOLO3NNOO Andino 39NVv30 HOLO3NNOO TANVd MOVE 121 0000000000000000 E 0000000000000000 XX A3H 1000106008 1405 SAILNOAXA 90082 28 193015 979 IVN IS 9 HOLIMS NOINN 937708105 193 8 30 1082IN TWNDIS OqTVSNV MHOLO3NNOO 1 3snd HOLIAS 3dO NO SNIA33 1 0 51408 5 gt FER sq31 88571 T 2 WOO OSW x 8031 TANNVHO WWOO 2 WOO qat 8031 TANNVHO K H3TIOHLNOO 103 90 3O1OHOIN T3NVd LNOYS TOOL ssauqav di WOLSND OOO OVW 7001 83M A 01 1 92 691 1304 1 TIY di 1 ov L WOO 842
247. set the SIGNAL GOOD bits for all signals connected to the LED6 board Retesting of the signals will commence immediately and in 1 second the fault status of all signals and their SIGNAL GOOD bits will be updated The RETEST LEDS system bit has a slow pick of 3 seconds is edge triggered and has a slow drop of 10 seconds The application bit must be set 1 for 3 seconds before the application will process the system bit The RETEST LEDS must be cleared 0 before the application will recognize another set 1 After the RETEST LEDS system bit is set 1 no transitions of the bit will be processed for 10 seconds This prevents logic from repeatedly clearing the fault status Flashing To overcome the long turn on time of an incandescent lamp application programs frequently flashed the signal with a 60 40 duty cycle 60 of the time on 40 off resulting in the signal appearing to be 50 on and 50 off Because the LED Signals turn on and off almost instantaneously a 50 50 duty cycle will provide the 50 50 visible flashing Example Board Definition BOARD THELED6 ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 TYPE LED6 OUTPUT SIGNAL OUTPUT 1 SIGNAL OUTPUT 2 SIGNAL OUTPUT 3 SIGNAL OUTPUT 4 SIGNAL OUTPUT 5 SIGNAL OUTPUT 6 SIGNAL GOOD SIGNAL GOOD 1 SIGNAL GOOD 2 SIGNAL GOOD 3 SIGNAL GOOD 4 SIGNAL GOOD 5 SIGNAL GOOD 6 15 10 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 AnsaldoSTS Examining an Application Program NV OUTPUT NV OUT 1 NV INPUT NV IN
248. shold 5 Event Threshold 6 Event Threshold 7 Event Threshold 8 Event Threshold 9 Event Threshold 10 Event Threshold 11 Event Threshold 12 Event Threshold 13 Event Threshold 14 Event Threshold 15 Event Threshold 16 Event Threshold 17 Event Threshold 18 Event Threshold 19 Event Threshold 20 Event Threshold 21 Event Threshold 22 Event Threshold 23 Event Threshold 24 Event Threshold 25 14 30 0 Fixed 1 Non vital Adjustable 1 Non vital Adjustable 1 Non vital Adjustable 1 Non vital Adjustable 1 Non vital Adjustable 1 Non vital Adjustable 1 Non vital Adjustable 1 Non vital Adjustable 1 Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Non vital Adjustable AW 77 AnsaldoSTS SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 4 AnsaldoSTS Event Threshold 26 Event Threshold 27 Event Threshold 28 Event Threshold 29 Event Threshold 30 Event Threshold 31 Event Threshold 32 Event Threshold 33 Event Threshold 34 Event Threshold 35 Event Threshold
249. sing the Network Diagnostic Tool advanced objctl Perform maintenance upload files Please see Section 5 3 Configuring the OC Ethernet Ports for instructions on setting up the Network Adapters for the first time See Section 6 for instructions on downloading a program that can find the IP addresses of the Network Adapters on the network for installing or replacing an OC that was previously programmed and the address is unknown 5 2 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 gt AnsaldoSTS Object Controller Configuration Setup 5 5 Configuring niacfg ini Network Adapter Configuration File CAUTION Modification of the niacfg ini file must only be performed by experienced users There is no error checking on this procedure and ANY errors in this process WILL render the OC unusable To only change a port IP address refer to Section 6 for details With Internet Explorer open page http 169 254 1 10 Figure 5 1 The resulting site Figure 5 2 prompts you for a username and password for Realm NA HTTP AWS Realm 3 Cannot find server Microsoft Internet Explorer e 18 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Be EE gt gt x e je Search Favorites 452 58 3 Address http 169 254 1 10 gt Links gt Snagit j Figure 5 1 Internet Explorer Site 169 254 1 10
250. stable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Non vital Adjustable SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 Sample Listing File 14 15 Sample Listing File Event Threshold 45 1 Non vital Adjustable Event Threshold 46 1 Event Threshold 47 1 Event Threshold 48 1 Event Threshold 49 1 Event Threshold 50 1 Event Threshold 51 1 Event Threshold 52 1 Event Threshold 53 1 Event Threshold 54 1 Event Threshold 55 1 Event Threshold 56 1 Event Threshold 57 1 Event Threshold 58 1 Event Threshold 59 1 Event Threshold 60 1 Event Threshold 61 1 Event Threshold 62 1 Event Threshold 63 1 Event Threshold 64 1 Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vital Adjustable Non vita
251. t 23mm gt 0 9055091 in 4075 7 8 16UN 2A i 0 20mm 2mm 0 0 787391 in 0 35 1 20 AS 0 0787391 J7381040030 Potted 10VDC s 60 LED gt 23mm i gt 0 9055091 in 975 M30 x 1 5 0 15mm 1 5mm 0 0 5905494 0 35 1 20 0 05905494 in J7381040031 Potted 10VDC gt 17 5mm gt 0 6889743 in 56 0 10mm 1mm 0 0 3936996 09571 20 0 03936996 in J7381040032 Potted 40VDC gt 12mm gt 0 4724395 in 4 0 7 5 M30 x 1 5 0 10mm 1 AS 0 0 3936996 in 935 120 36 5 0 03936996 in J7381040033 Quick 10VDC LED 62 Disconnect gt 11mm B gt 0 4330696 in 4 0 7 5 E M12 x 1 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 3 41 gt OC Configurations 7 AnsaldoSTS 3 2 3 LED6 Signal Driver Board Specifications The ASTS USA LED6 Signal Driver Package Part Numbers N177001 15 to 18 has been developed to drive the ASTS USA LED Signal System It is used for controlling and protecting the ASTS USA LED signals CAUTION The LED6 Signal Driver PCB is designed to vitally drive the ASTS USA LED signals and only those signals It must not be used to drive incandescent signals or other non ASTS USA LED signals Although the LED6 Signal Driver PCB can connect to 6 LEDs it can illuminate only 3 6 and 2 8 LEDs at any given time The LED6 Signal Driver Board contains a high power conditional power supply CPS that requires a separate battery feed into the orange WAGO connector J1 on the rear of the OC
252. t Controller or a standard Ethernet cable for connection to a network or a hub The Network Diagnostic Tool requires as a minimum Internet Explorer Version 6 0 or higher Java Run Time Environment Version 1 4 2 or higher Ethernet crossover cable for direct connection to the Object Controller or a standard Ethernet cable for connection to a network or a hub 10 2 Launching the Network Diagnostic Tool NOTE Java must be installed and enabled on the PC Please refer to the Java Run Time Environment found on the CD supplied with the Object Controller This tool is accessible by using Internet Explorer and connecting to the Ethernet Port labeled WebTool on the OC For example if the WebTool Ethernet Port is at IP address 192 168 1 12 you would type into the Internet Explorer browser address bar http 192 168 1 12 It will prompt for a username password Enter webtools for the username and ussl for the password u s s then the number 1 Click on Launch Network Diagnostic Tool to start the Java application which establishes the connection between the PC and OC Microsoft Internet Explorer E RunTime Environment is enabled IF Network Diagnostic Tool does not start ensure version 1 4 2 greater is installed To get version go to Start gt Run type cmd type java version at command prompt Figure 10 1 Java Version Verification Dialog Box The box shown in Figure 10 1 prompts the user to the approp
253. t Controller N17700115 Front and Rear Panels SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 3 18 3 19 c 6 MOV8 LNOHJ 5 8 O 2 WOO L O 55 dl NOLSND 8 i I HOLO3NNOO LNdNI 1001 83 1 qr penso 1304 OILSONDVIG MTM YOLOANNOO H LIMS 9 qa1 440 NO J 66 IVN 5 S1HOd lt lt sonda 9NIASN H san 5 XX 10001050089 T 14 esrb He MOTI3A z 98 1021 10 s 3 5 0 qa141ndi1no M S 90052 SQ31 13NNVHO
254. t Internet Explorer nmi LINK INFORMATION Home RUN TIME MONITOR Board Information Link Information Free Run Variable Display Serial Message Monitor HISTORICAL DATA User Data Log Event Log Error Log Event Error Code Look Up SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SET UP Set Clock Reset Unit Configuration Link Information Link Name PEER 1 Link Type MILPEER otal properly framed messages 50416 Good received message count 50416 Received init message count 0 Received data message count 16863 Received status message count 16863 Received service signal count 16690 otal missed message count 0 otal messages transmitted 157 ransmitted init message count 0 ransmitted data message count 223 ransmitted status message count 223 ransmitted service signal count 223 otal messages acknowledged 223 Stale invalid ACK count 0 otal messages NAK ed Stale invalid NAK count 0 cknowledge timeout count 0 Consecutive ACK timeouts 0 Max consecutive ACK timeouts 0 Grant timeout count 0 consecutive GRANT retrys 0 ILLLe em Lamm hunn A Clear _1 Clear PEER_2 Figure 10 6 Link Information Display SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 1 24 2007 9 52 AM w Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool Z AnsaldoSTS 10 4 2 1 Clear Link Statistics The Network Diagnostic Tool has the ability to clear the accumulated statistics for a particular Communication Link Below the displaye
255. t either has to be turned on or the application logic must set and then clear the Retest LEDs board application bit This is typically done by mapping the non vital input for the LED6 board to the retest bit Adding the following line to the LOGIC section of an application program will do this mapping ASSIGN NV IN1 to LED6boardname Retest LEDs SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 3 45 OC Configurations 7 AnsaldoSTS NOTE Note that in the above logic statement example is a user defined name for the non vital input bit of the LED6 board Refer to Section 15 2 4 5 Defining Board Type LED6 for more information on how to define an LED6 PCB in the application program With this line in the application the non vital input must be set for three seconds Once recognized as being actuated the OC will set the status of all signals connected to the LED6 Board to be good and begin retesting One second later all signals will be updated to their current status good or faulty When the non vital input is set an event will be logged The OC must detect the non vital input to be clear before the non vital input is set again so that the system will recognize that it needs to clear the signal s status and begin retesting This will prevent the OC from continuously clearing the signals status After a faulty signal has been replaced and recognized by the OC an event will be logged and the SIGNAL GOOD bit for the sign
256. t for a clear signal and CANCEL is a track relay the signal request will be cleared when the track is occupied Cascading timer relays Figure 11 7 are used to build up a comparatively long delay on the output delay relay Only one timing specification SET and CLEAR needs to be written for all timer relays equal addends for the desired delay TI T2 SET 5 SEC CLEAR 5 SEC CASCADING TIMERS X SECOND DELAY Figure 11 7 Conceptual Relay Model for Object Controller Programming C SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 11 7 Application Programming 7 AnsaldoSTS 11 8 ASSIGN Statement The ASSIGN statement enables the various Boolean operators OR NOT etc and bit names to be combined in logic equations Four logical operators are available to create expressions in a program Table 11 1 Table 11 1 Logical Operator Symbols SHORTHAND RESERVED WORD OPERATOR AND ___ OR a ____ Either form reserved word or shorthand operator character may be used in assignment expressions For example ASSIGN IN A XOR IN C AND NOT IN A OR IN B TO OUT 5 Either form reserved word or shorthand operator character may be used in assignment expressions For example the above ASSIGN statement may be written using shorthand symbols ASSIGN IN C IN A TO OUT 5 The operators AND OR NOT and XOR along with their shorthand symbols are evaluated according
257. t the time of the error by clicking on it and then press the Help button A help box on that error will appear SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 10 13 Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool AnsaldoSTS E NETWORK DIAGNOSTIC TOOL VERSION 1 1 N800306 0001 Microsoft Internet Explorer Home RUN TIME MONITOR Board Information Link Information Free Run Variable Display Serial Message Monitor HISTORICAL DATA User Data Log Event Log Error Log Event Error Code Look Up SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SET UP Set Clock Reset Unit Configuration 10 6 1 Set Clock Type Time ERROR LOG Code Event O xl event event event event event event Warning event event event Warning event event event event event event event event event Warning event 77 it 4 01 23 09 58 25 02 AM 01 23 09 58 25 02 AM 01 23 09 58 25 01 AM 01 23 09 58 25 01 AM 01 23 09 58 25 01 AM 01 23 09 58 25 00 AM 01 23 09 58 04 00 AM 01 23 09 57 50 00 AM 01 23 09 57 50 00 AM 01 23 09 57 47 00 AM 01 23 09 57 47 00 AM 01 23 09 57 45 00 AM 01 23 09 57 42 05 AM 01 23 09 57 42 05 AM 01 23 09 41 48 02 AM 01 23 09 41 48 02 AM 01 23 09 41 48 01 AM 01 23 09 41 48 01 AM 01 23 09 41 48 01 AM 01 23 09 41 48 00 AM 01 23 09 41 27 00 AM 01 23 09 41 13 00 AM 9834020000002502 9836020000002501 9837020001021802 9834010000002502 9836010000002501 9834010000001002 5833010000001002 810305 34300002 8105002002000001
258. t value is 32 MESSAGE DATA SIZE HMAC key used in the message security algorithm Allowable values are 8 to 64 hexadecimal bytes There is no default EMP TYPE Allowable values are 0 to 65 535 The default value is 20 480 Broadcast a device status change immediately after it occurs Allowable values are 0 or 1 The default value is 0 ENCRYPTED KEY BROADCAST CHANGE 9 1 2 3 CLASSC EMP Protocol Station Definition The CLASSC EMP protocol communication driver supports the definition of 1 to 3 stations each supporting the transmission of 1 to 128 bits of signal aspect information Note however that at the time of printing of this manual the available radio equipment only supports transmission of 30 bits of signal aspect information Boolean bits may be assigned to these stations as required by the application programmer The CLASSC EMP link does not receive any messages The CLASSC EMP station configuration parameters are listed and described in Table 9 3 Table 9 3 55 Protocol Station Configuration Parameters ADDRESS rene a station on a CLASSC EMP link and assigns its address There is no Specifies whether or not an CLASSC EMP will be enabled on unit initialization 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED There is no default STATION NAME oe string that defines the name of a CLASSC EMP station There is String s of hexadecimal bytes enclosed in double quotes containing radio 10 time and frequency information As m
259. the text editor opened enter Control V on the keyboard to paste the text 10 12 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 5 AnsaldoSTS Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool e Tosave the text file enter Control S on the keyboard e Select the location and filename and click Save 10 5 2 5 Help Button This link leads to a view Figure 10 13 in which the user enters a 16 digit hex event or error code number and receives help information The help text is a detailed description of the event or error Enter the 16 hex digit code example is 8103 0194 0533 0002 Hex Code Applet Window Figure 10 13 Help Button Window 10 5 3 System Error Log Since the older events may be lost the System Error Log Figure 10 14 contains a list of the last fifty time stamped system critical errors The System Error Log follows the same rules as the System Event Log but is limited to critical errors This view has the exact same functionality as the System Event Log View except for the Clear Log feature The display lists the most recent fify critical errors saved in the System Error Log Click the reload button to refresh the display with the current error data stored on the OC Note that no Clear button exists for this log The System Error Log cannot be cleared because it contains important error information which should not be deleted To get help on any particular error highligh
260. tion Example Board Definition BOARD The SCC ADJUSTABLE ENABLE 1 TYPE SCC 15 4 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 5 AnsaldoSTS Examining an Application Program 15 2 4 2 Defining Board Type MIX I O Example board definition Address Class 16 Bit VPA A definition of this type of board looks like BOARD lt USER NAME gt ADJUSTABLE FIXED ENABLE lt FLAG gt TYPE MIXIO OUTPUT lt bit list gt 1 4 Output bits INPUT lt bit list gt 1 4 Input bits NV ANALOG INPUT lt numeric variable gt ADJUSTABLE FIXED ENABLE FLAG ADJUSTABLE FIXED MINIMUM THRESHOLD VALUE lt NUMERIC gt 0 0 30 0 Volts ADJUSTABLE FIXED MAXIMUM THRESHOLD VALUE lt NUMERIC gt 0 0 30 0 Volts PROXIMITY SENSOR 1 ADJUSTABLE FIXED ENABLE lt FLAG gt PROXIMITY SENSOR 2 ADJUSTABLE FIXED ENABLE lt FLAG gt Additional defined bits lt board name gt Proximity Sensor 1 Read only lt board name gt Proximity Sensor 1 Enabled Read only lt board name gt Proximity Sensor 1 Indeterminate Read only SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 15 5 Examining Application Program 77 AnsaldoSTS lt board name gt Proximity Sensor 2 Read only lt board name gt Proximity Sensor 2 Enabled Read only lt board name gt Proximity Sensor 2 Indeterminate Read only Notes Threshold levels for the analog inputs are defined in tenths of a volt and r
261. tion Refer to Section 3 13 Unit Configuration in SM 6800D Note the following information about the Configuration Section The Configuration Section specifies various system parameters such as system logging level debug port address and user defined items Refer to the sample Configuration Section that follows CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Configuration Items The SYSTEM sub sections specify system configuration options User configurable bits and user configurable numerics are not used in the OC SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 15 13 Application Program AnsaldoSTS Table 15 3 Compiler Defined System Bits SYSTEM BIT NAME BIT FUNCTION REASON FOR NO SUPPORT Non Vital inputs set from Front Unlike the MicRoLok II CPU Board the OC CPU AUXn INPUT Panel The value of n is Board does not have a front panel with toggle between 1 and 32 switches Unlike the MicROLOK CPU Board the OC CPU Board does not have a front panel with toggle switches The OC does not support the LAMP16 board that is available to MICROLOK Lamp boards diagnostic mode LAMP RESET OPTION has been overridden by Front Panel and is in effect Currently there is reader the that PCMCIA INSTALLED used for the User Data Log to stored externally Currently there is no card reader on the OC that BATTERY HEALTH card battery can be used for th
262. to Access the System Configuration Options Click on the System Configuration link on the Network Diagnostic Tool main menu The system displays a password dialog box that lets the user specify whether to view or change configuration settings Click in the Password box and then enter the appropriate password The default password is microlokii case sensitive If the first option Examine settings is selected then the user does not need to enter a password The system configuration display appears on the computer screen See Figure 10 21 This display provides direct access to all of the OC configuration options Select from the available options to display screens that allow the user to view modify the configuration settings for the system in general I O boards and communications links DIAGNOSTIC TOOL VERSION 1 1 4800306 0001 Microsoft Internet Explorer ___________ ini xj _ 1 System Configuration vital Config Please select one of the configuration below RUN TIME MONITOR System Configuration General Board Configuration z TheSCC 60 NUM 1 60 NUM 2 HISTORICAL scc IN6 OUT6 IN6 OUT6 Link Configuration PEER_1 SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SET UP Cancel System Configuration 1 24 2007 10 16 AM Figure 10 21 Typical System Configuration Display SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 10 21 200 Netw
263. to GOOD 5 Controller LED6 Board 5826 DAC ADC Start Value t Flag 2605 0101 Controller LED6 Board B2b DAC ADC Bit Step t Flag 2605 0102 e LED6 Board B2b High Power CPS Measurement EOC t 2605 2240 0103 16 4 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 lt N 77 AnsaldoSTS Error Codes ERROR MESSAGE ACTUAL ERROR CODE Object Controller LED6 Board 5826 DAC ADC t ADC1 Start 2605 240 1 Object Controller LED6 Board 5826 DAC ADC t ADC2 Start 2605 2240 2 Object Controller LED6 Board 5826 DAC ADC t ADC1 Step Value 2605 240 4 Object Controller LED6 Board 5826 DAC ADC t ADC2 Step Value 2605 240 8 Object Controller LED6 Board 9820 Shift t W4d occurred on 2605 2740 1111 Object Controller LED6 Board B2b Shift t W4d occurred on 2 2605 2740 2222 Object Controller LED6 Board B2b Shift Filter Hit on Output W4d _____ 2605 2240 7 3333 Object Controller LED6 Board B2b Utlity EOC t 6 2605 7260 010 Object Controller LED6 Board B2b Utility ADC1 Signature t W6x 2605 260 040 Object Controller LED6 Board 5826 Utility ADC2 Signature t W6x 2605 270 0402 Controller LED6 IMON UnShifted data Pre W2x Post W4x Path 2605 a 1012 Object Controller LED6 VMON UnShifted
264. troller The Reset Unit link resets the OC identical to a manual CPU push button reset Pressing the Reset OC link results in the screen shown in Figure 10 16 OC units with vital outputs employ a CPS to control the connection of the battery to the outputs The Network Diagnostic Tool will display the screen shown in Figure 10 17 when the OC unit is in normal operation Note the CPS Up display in the top right corner of the screen SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 10 15 m Cw Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool 4 AnsaldoSTS NETWORK DIAGNOSTIC TOOL ERSION 1 1 N800306 0001 CPS Down Home Network Diagnostic Tool Version 1 1 N800306 0001 Address 172 16 103 162 Board Information Executive Version 01 1 RUN TIME MONITOR Link Information Executive CRC F41A Free Run Variable Display Application CRC C824 Serial Message Monitor Program Name wa s5 gt HISTORICAL DATA Compiler Version CPS is down User Data Log PC Date Wednesda Do You Want to set CPS UP l Event Log No Error Log Java Applet Window Event Error Code Look Up SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SET UP Set Clock Reset Unit Configuration Set Time 1 24 2007 9 55 AM Figure 10 16 Object Controller Reset Dialog 10 16 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 77 AnsaldoSTS Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool NETWORK DIAGNOSTIC TOOL VERSION 1 1 N800306 0001 Microsoft Internet Explorer E Ho
265. updated for the particular code The functionality of this view is dependent on the validity and thoroughness of the help file Network Diagnostic Tool Version 1 11 x i Results KU 16 digits entered 8103019A05330002 The Event System Reset Reset Completed Help ID 1093 Java Applet Window Figure 10 26 Typical Error Code Help Results Click OK to retrieve detailed information on this error as shown in Figure 10 26 This information is derived from the Network Diagnostic Tool error code database If the PC is not connected to the OC unit the error dialog box shown in Figure 10 27 may be displayed when the Get Help button of Figure 10 25 is clicked At this point the PC Link must be re established This can be done by re launching the Network Diagnostic Tool Network Diagnostic Tool Version 1 10 N800306 01 D Results A 16 digits entered 1000100010001000 The Event Unknown TRACK error Code 1000 1000 1000 1000 Help ID 1036 Java Applet Window Figure 10 27 Unknown Error Code 10 7 Close Window Exit Application To exit the OC Network Diagnostic Tool click on the X at the top right of the window 10 28 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Application Programming 11 APPLICATION PROGRAMMING Application programming is the ASTS USA or customer designed site specific software code It defines specific location control data to the OC The OC system logically processe
266. upported SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 5 17 Object Controller Configuration Setup 7 AnsaldoSTS y AnsaldoSTS 5 18 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 6 7 AnsaldoSTS Acquiring the IP address of an OC Ethernet Port ACQUIRING THE IP ADDRESS OF AN OC ETHERNET PORT If it should become necessary to acquire the IP address of an OC Ethernet port that is not known the Digi Device Discovery Utility can be used This utility can be downloaded using the following procedure 1 2 Go to www digi com Click on the SUPPORT tab and select Diagnostics Utilities and MIBs from the pull down menu From the Select Your Product for Support pull down menu choose Digi Connect and click SUBMIT From the OS Specific Diagnostics Utilities and MIBs pull down menu choose your operating system typically Microsoft Windows XP Download the executable utility Device Discovery Utility for Windows by right clicking on it and choosing Save Target As Digi Device Discovery Figure 6 1 Digi Device Discovery Utility Icon The tool installation places and icon on the desktop Figure 6 1 which when clicked opens the screen shown in Figure 6 2 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 6 1 gt Acquiring the IP address of OC Ethernet Port AnsaldoSTS 6 1 Changing a Port IP Address with the Digi Device Discovery Tool Digi Device Discovery a lol x Address A
267. used interchangeably with Trimble Protocol The GPS MASTER protocol communication driver implements a subset of the Trimble Standard Interface Protocol TSIP described in Trimble publications 58873 00 and 34462 00 The purpose of this communication link is to obtain an accurate time from the GPS satellite constellation using a GPS time receiver to set the Object Controller real time clock and provide time for the CLASSC EMP protocol communication driver described later in this manual Currently only the Trimble Acutime Gold Smart Antenna Trimble P N 55238 00 is supported Other Trimble GPS time receivers will be certified for use with this communication driver as required 9 1 1 1 Physical Connections The GPS MASTER link must be assigned to Port 2 in the Object Controller application program The GPS receiver must be connected to the 9 pin D serial connector COM2 on the Object Controller using a ASTS USA serial isolator converter N16404701 and Acutime Gold Smart Antenna cable Trimble P N 60148 as shown in Figure 9 1 The function of the serial isolator converter is to change the RS 422 signal levels produced by the GPS receiver to the RS 232 levels expected by Object Controller COM2 The isolation provided by the ASTS USA isolator converter is not required unless the GPS receiver is powered by a power source that is isolated from the Object Controller power source SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 9 1 i GP
268. user to easily view the text without constantly updating the data populating the display removes all of the currently displayed information from the screen and restarts the updating process The selected variables bits in the list remain unchanged 10 4 4 Serial Message Monitor This function enables you to monitor serial message traffic on a selected active serial link To monitor serial message traffic click on Serial Message Monitor on the Other Tools main menu The system displays the Serial Message Monitor as shown in Figure 10 10 Select an enabled serial link to monitor from the list on the left and begin monitoring by clicking on the Start button Message traffic sent and received on the serial link will begin appearing on the right side of the serial monitor screen as it is sent received The display will show the approximate time the message was sent received the message type and the message content in hexadecimal bytes Messages sent by the monitored link and received messages addressed to the monitor link will display in their entirety Only header and address information will be displayed for messages addressed to other units on the communications link The message display may be stopped for study or review by clicking on the Stop button SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 10 9 AN 77 AnsaldoSTS Network Diagnostic Tool WebTool 2 NETWORK DIAGNOSTIC TOOL VERSION 1 1 N800306 0001 Microsoft Int
269. was successful or not Address http 169 254 1 10 message htm Upload Status Status The Application in RAMO was uploaded successfully The Application uploaded has been deleted R AMO Figure 7 6 Upload Status Page 7 4 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 7 AnsaldoSTS Network Adapter Configuration niacfg ini 8 NETWORK ADAPTER CONFIGURATION NIACFG INI The OC has two niacfg ini files One is for the WebTool port and the other is for the COM ports Each file is stored in the respective Digi FLASHO memory and is accessed by the OC s CPU as needed CAUTION The niacfg ini is not error checked If the users modified niacfg ini file contains errors the Ethernet port will not operate The niacfg ini file stores all the configuration parameters for the Network Adapters It defines how the Ethernet port will operate The network settings are specified in this file This file is a standard ini format Major sections are denoted within brackets Comments are started by a and continue to the end of the line The order of the options doesn t matter but each option has to be within its correct section For example BIT_RATE can t show up in the UDP section it must be in the GENERAL section Samples of the Factory WebTool and Factory Application Ports niacfg ini files are shown below CAUTION When setting the BAUD for the Application Ports or DEBUG_PORT_BAU
270. will require an address change and the mode should remain at 1 and the bit rate may need to be changed per communications connection device For further operations refer to Section 8 5 6 3 Upload niacfg ini to the Object Controller With Internet Explorer open page http 169 254 1 10 The site will prompt you for a username and password for Realm NA HTTP AWS Realm See Figure 5 2 Enter advanced for the username and objctl for the password Click on the Network Adapter Advanced Options link See Figure 5 3 then click on the Upload link Figure 5 9 Select FLASHOQ as the directory to upload to then click on Browse See Figure 5 10 and select the modified niacfg ini file SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 5 13 w Cw Object Controller Configuration Setup 7 AnsaldoSTS http 169 254 1 10 advanced htm gt snagt 5 MICROLOK II Net Adapter Advanced Tools Network Settings Display network settings MLK Upload Reboot Digi Upload Upload niacfg ini or Executive or Application RAMO directory List RAMO directory FLASHO directory List FLASHO directory Erase Erases the FLASH File System Figure 5 9 MLK Upload Link Address http 169 254 1 10 upload htm 21 Links gt snagtt ps File Upload Select a directory FLASHO Directory File to Upload Browse E To change the configuration upl
271. x u 3 40 3 2 3 LED6 Signal Driver Board 3 42 3 2 4 Coded Input Board 3 47 3 9 User Interface 3 48 4 CONFIGURE THE PC TO COMMUNICATE WITH THE OcC 4 1 4 1 Minimum Requirements 20 E 4 1 4 2 Configuring Internet 4 1 4 2 1 Deleting Saved Temporary Internet 4 1 4 2 2 Modify Network Settings n nasus 4 3 4 3 Apply Power to the Object sse 4 6 4 4 Connecting the PC to the Object Controller 4 6 5 OBJECT CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION SETUP u u u 5 1 5 1 ToolS f orthe OG u uuu 5 1 5 2 Network Interface Adapter u U nennen nenas 5 1 5 3 Configuring the Object Controller Ethernet 5 2 5 4 Accessing the OC s Network Adapter 5 2 5 5 Configuring niacfg ini Network Adapter Configuration File eese 5 3 5 6 Main Web ee etate tette 5 4 5 6 1 Typical niacfg ini Com Port File
272. ze 0 2384 Application Image Checksum 5e35 Compile complete B errors B warnings Compilation log written to OBJ_DEMO_BASIC ml1l C MLK_Comp gt cd GIN Figure 12 3 DOS Command Line Navigation The compiler returns a non zero value to the command processor if there were any errors during compilation or if there was any problem with the form or content of the command line Otherwise the compiler returns zero See Figure 12 3 The compiler automatically creates the compiled files mlp and mll in the same file directory Hdress C MLK_Comp Her X Name Desk Imk2comp exe 082 DEMO BASIC ML2 d 082 DEMO BASIC mll lt OBJ_DEMO_BASIC mip Figure 12 4 Compiler with Compiled Files The compiled files as in the example are shown in Figure 12 4 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 12 3 Compiling an OC Application 7 AnsaldoSTS 12 1 2 Output Image File Refer to Section 4 4 Output Image File in SM 6800D The output image file mlp e The primary output of the compiler is a memory image e The initial Programmable Read Only Memory PROM Table begins at the lowest address in the file Unless overridden on the command line the address is dependent on the kind of application specified in the PROGRAM statement For the OC the PROGRAM TYPE is Object Controller The default base address and maximum size for an application is listed in e Table 12 1 Table
273. zero values for times Valid ranges for lt time value gt depend on the associated lt unit gt Refer to Table 15 2 Table 15 2 Timer Bit Ranges lt UNIT gt VALID lt TIME VALUE gt VALUES MSEC milliseconds 0 or 500 up to 6553500 in 100 millisecond increments SEC seconds 0 6553 in 1 second increments MIN minutes 0 109 1 minute increments If the FIXED qualifier no qualifier is present before a Timer Bit List those timers cannot be changed during a configuration session 15 2 7 System Bits Several bits are predefined by the compiler to indicate executive status information to the application and to allow the application to control some executive functions Most of the System Bits that are supported by the MICROLOK II Executive Software are also supported by the OC 15 12 SM 9494 Rev 7 February 2011 A AnsaldoSTS Examining an Application Program Executive Software please refer to SM 6800D and SM 6800K for a complete list of System Bits that are supported by MICROLOK There are a few System Bits that are not supported by the OC Executive Software because these features are not available to the OC Please refer to for a list of system bits that are not supported by the OC NOTE There are only four LED n System Bits which are used for Non Vital Outputs that are displayed on the front of the OC whereas MICROLOK II supports eight LED n System Bits 15 2 8 Unit Configuration Sec

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

32CH Standalone Network Video Recorder -  5010 5020 (Español)  Sony DSR-DR1000A DVD Recorder User Manual    （開放防滴）形 全閉水冷熱交換器（全閉内冷）  Sniper Manual - Rutherford Electrical Engineering Services  DECT UG D530_D530P EN  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file